Home

Owners Manual - Dealer e

1. 97 o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 98 O Outside Mirrors ss pes eh ee EES SE S3 98 OTower MITOS EER AREA AE DE RAS RS 99 G Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 100 O Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature 100 ll Uconnect M Phone If Equipped 100 HE ei HON sis 94 2 SWAT SE GESE ws 102 O Phone Call Features ss SES ss ss 111 D Uconnect Phone Features 113 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 118 H Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone css acd exo HA ose RE 120 O General Information sis se skei EDE HR ES 129 ll Voice Command If Equipped 129 H Voice Command System Operation 129 HICONIIONUS 25 9 992 9 99 9 WAR ERG Rd 131 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id E Voice MMOS pubiee cone eee sph awe ee 134 hc MMC T 134 O Front Manual Seat Adjustment 135 O Front Seat Adjustment Recline 136 a Six Way Driver s Power Seat With Manual RECE iii macte CR eS ed het a e ids 137 H Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 138 O Adjusting Active Head Restraints 138 o Heated Seats If Equipped 141 0 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold Flat ln bie RED DE E a ee 142 N To Open And Close The Hood 145 NIIS TEE EE ET EE OE NT 147 EDNTUIBEOBOHOD LEVET ins some 28 eee saigi 147 o Headlights And Parking Lights 148 H Instrument Panel DIMME sss esu
2. 2 072607575 1 Fill Plug 2 Drain Plug Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only to fill hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 Draining Fluid First remove the fill plug 1 then the drain plug 2 Recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill plugs is 15 25 ft Ibs 20 34 N m CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs You could damage them and cause a leak Lubricant Selection Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the fluid becomes contaminated with water Change the fluid immediately if contaminated with water Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check e Front axle lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole when the vehicle is in a level position e Rear axle lubricant should be 0 5 in 11 mm below
3. Cargo Tie Downs NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 WARNING WARNING Continued e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear anchors provided for child seat tethers axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the en WARNING Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of The weight and position of cargo and passengers can the seatback This could impair visibility or be change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per collision sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your To help protect against personal injury passengers vehicle should not be seated in the rear cargo area The e Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits rear cargo space is intended for load carrying described on the label attached to the left door or purposes only not for passengers who should sit left door center pillar in seats and use seat belts Continued 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Cargo Load Floor If Equipped Th
4. List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the vr button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp
5. Tire Markings e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure T tiek 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and e lemporary spare tires are high pressure compact Temperature Grades spares designed for temporary emergency use only 330 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Tires designed to this standard have the letter T e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diamete
6. taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer Inspect exhaust system towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MANTENANCE SCHEDULES 455 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet Adjust parking brake on vehicles off road or frequent trailer towing equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Inspect the transfer case fluid damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer R
7. 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use of safety chains is recom mended Attach towing device to main structural mem bers of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brack ets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed NOTE The transmission must be in NEUTRAL under any towing configuration Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Front Wheels Raised The speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km This vehicle may be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL the ignition key in the LOCK position the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground 398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN id Four Wheel Driv
8. If Equipped This indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on 29 Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button Changing the Display Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode On vehicles equipped with a Base Cluster press and release it once again to display the outside temperature On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster press and release it once again to display the outside temperature and compass heading in the screen below the speedometer Refer to Compass Trip Com puter for details Resetting the Trip Odometer Display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Irip B Then push and hold the button approxi mately two seconds until the display resets to 0 The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odom eter 30 Compass Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Compass Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages For further information refer to Compass Trip Com puter or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 31 4WD Indicator If Equipped This light indicates the vehicle is in four wheel AWD drive and 4LOCK 4WD al
9. Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 458 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary O C O O O G G C LL L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 459 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rota
10. The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters WARNING varies considerably Only high quality filters should be e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean recommended over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps s
11. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 CUPHOLDERS The rear passengers have cupholders at the rear of the There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers center console located in the center console 035132773 Rear Cupholders Front Cupholders 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Glove Box Storage Compartment The glove box storage compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel Pull outward on the latch to open the storage compartment Glove Box Storage Compartment 035233720 Front Storage Compartment The front storage compartment located on the left side of the instrument panel can hold cell phones PDAs and other small items 035232793 Front Storage Compartment N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Console Storage Compartment The center console has a removable storage tray which To open press the latch and lift the cover can hold cell phones PDAs and other small items 035232796 Center Console Removable Storage Tray 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate opening any door or by rotating the dimmer control on the multifunction lever to the extreme top position Cargo Tie Down Hooks The tie downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving
12. e Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period ru Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with
13. the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 387 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down WARNING an impending overheat condition You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure heat the mode control to floor and the blower control cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a too
14. 1 2 3 Actual Gear s Al 1 lowed 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down 306 STARTING AND OPERATING NN id Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled fifth gear OVERDRIVE The trans mission will automatically shift from fourth gear to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e the vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the transmission has reached normal operating temperature NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into OVER DRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch later in this section During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature This feature improves the warm up time of the engine and transmission During cold temperature operation the transmission may not downshift from second gear in
15. 24 Belts SEL sre PRE EK BA woe D oe eS ee 39 88 Body Mechanism Lubrication 413 D Pilar roro in Loy DD PEU 334 Brake Assist System sopa Eed EE RD d e dedos 323 Brake Control System Electronic 321 Drake EDS 2 sy EE eg ER eh RADE he RE ene OR es AA7 Brake Pak iS 22 osse Dan ka AREE pee oa ee N 317 Piko le erer SPEE REGIE eF 423 Anti Lock ABS 224646044 dees ie dr d 319 322 Master CU DE 22 aas eric PE ESOS RR 423 Ik dsl dT IE EE bas Hees OE 317 Wate LEDE sos waELOSE BARE RE 196 Brake Transmission Interlock 297 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 86 Bul Replacement ase oa au boo eS ees 440 BUGS Lie suco icem oes ERE ER ee RES RS 90 440 Calibration COMPAES auod urT3 92V X Sys 210217 Capacities DUO asse pie S gana red der a WEES 445 Caps Filler lic OE RE EA RR 364 Power oet ao se scu ene Reese oe Ios HR d 316 Car MOSS on RAAD DAE SAKE dete d RE ER 429 Carbon Monoxide Warning 87 363 Cargo Area Hestures 242 iss sive nyia BRA 180 Carso Compartment 43293 3 i ob ARR ER 180 ERROR ET OE RASSE RP 180 Carol DUE 20029 ERAS ER ER OROS KO ERES 180 oS Id Caro bod Bloot 44624 oh ER RARR RA ETE PS 182 Caro De DOWdS erori 2 9 3 99 0 54 44 DR EERS 180 Cargo Vehicle Loading is xar d sd hne p ans 366 Cellular Phone leen 100 275 Center High Mounted Stop Light LA Contao Label us carus dorsi qoe S HE AA eod E
16. If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound However it will cause a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to display in the EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will ed illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Cent
17. LODGE 2000 NIitlO OWNER S MANUAL o m O c REEDE e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION 944 545 ees Be n ER WK RE eae ea EN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING sesse ss see sesse TABLE OF CONTENTS Information Provided by DEEFNLER CONTENTS B introduction INTRODUCTION B Rollover Warning leere Mi How To Use This Manual 4 W Warnings And Cautions 4 Vehicle Identification Number 5 Wi Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Id INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the ve
18. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation WARNINCG Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Feature The driver s and front passenger s if equipped for pas senger side power window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is
19. The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 4 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 5 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight sec
20. button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the vn button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the EVR button and say the Setup Voice Training command NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Command system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror
21. button when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to DRIVE position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Automatic Transmis sion in Starting and Operating for further information Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency N STARTING AND OPERATING 383 Cooling System RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND To reduce potential for engine and transmission over MOTORHOME ETC heating take the following actions Two Wheel Drive Models All Four Wheels On The Ground Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground Highway Driving while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe Reduce speed transmission damage WARNING If the driveshaft is removed the vehicle can roll even City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily if the transmission is in PARK which could cause serious injury or death The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa tion The parking brake must remain engaged unles
22. 1 First This range is used for hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression brak ing at low speeds Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled fourth gear OVERDRIVE The transmission will automatically shift from third gear into OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL button has not been activated The transmission will downshift from OVERDRIVE to DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL button This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission 302 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift into third gear NOTE The TOW HAUL mode locks out Overdrive Tow Haul Button The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed e
23. A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
24. A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 turn on upon the next ignition key cycle In addition the EVIC will display a Low Pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires 4 The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure value The EVIC will also display a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to remind you to service the flat tire Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire do
25. Hear Ranges sa Koh soaps 5 BEELD Poder d ede d D Five Speed Automatic Transmission AOL ENOI m E eat Kanes erse eir eae ER OR REDS ei 290 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id ll Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped 308 WB Power Steering se se See ese se ee 315 O MP 143 Single Speed Part Time O Power Steering Fluid Check vo ig 0940 24 316 ies ET TT oP W Parking Brake llle 017 N Shifting Procedure Flectronically Shifted ant Lock Brake System uu 319 lll On Road Driving Tips 310 N Electronic Brake Control System 321 E Off Road Driving Tips Be GE ET es 4 When To Use 4L Or 4LO Low Range sers 311 o Traction Control System TCS si scie ors 323 O Driving Through Water 311 SE AE TE 5 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 312 O Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 324 OHM Climbing el AA EL cus entes ni D Traction Downhill esses AE is EO EL After Driving OiRoad iioii vens 314 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 W Tire Safety Information 329 Lie OPNS sai EE OAAR NE AS 344 Eie Mak NES sons MEE Dee OP ie HR DR VI 329 Heb idee DIES 4 te 5 as oa ete cena 24 345 D Tire Identification Number TIN 32 ME Cais 25 oe ee eee ERN X Re X or 346 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 333 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 347 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 334 W Tire Pressure Monit
26. Radio FM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel 1 ds ea d ae dH e ist Channel to hear a list of available channels this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel l Radio M t itch to th di e Next Station to select the next station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu s 44 p e h h 3 e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Radio Menu t itch to the radi A Mc ne el tO eee OE To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Memo Previous to play the previous memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In l l Delete to delete a memo this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record
27. WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN MPEG Sampling keit as Pit Rate pe 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 Layer 3 Sampling Bit Rate kbps esteties Freguency kHz P 48 44 1 32 48 64 96 128 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs ma
28. When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death 021807387 Manual Lock Plunger THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Power Door Locks If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key A door lock switch is located on each of the front door is in the ignition and either of the front doors is open the panels Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and power locks will not operate This prevents you from liftgate accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the Key Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The automatic door locks feature is enabled The transmission is in gear All doors are closed Power Door Lock Switch 2 3 4 The throttle is pressed 1 Unlock 2 Lock 2 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic D
29. and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 336 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 75
30. antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e f frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 WARNING e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install only the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mile age and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance
31. are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Setup Uconnect Tutorial Read Send Messages Messages 030607515 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Voice Tree Phonebook Phensbosik Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed SHE Enter Name 1st Confirmation EN at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number Enter Number is played Enter New New Entry Added Nurber Entry is modified Phonebook Cleared Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Announcement Confirmation Select Audio SMS Incoming Prompts Devices Message Toggle Confirmation New phone Select a language well English Espanol temporarily or Francais Prompts mar override phone priorities Select phone to be deleted List Phones System Lists Phones Mote Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 oice Commands Primar Alternate s X three O tw fj eight nine star e O C G continue delete dial download edit home p 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Voice Commands Voice Commands Primar Pr
32. exited and the radio will tune to the preset station NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between gt playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc e These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e VESTM Lock Locks out rear VESTM remote controls if
33. press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not pl
34. while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the S button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery conditi
35. 125 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency KHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a fold
36. 25 mph 40 km h AA The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right Tilt Steering Control Handle side of the steering wheel NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system off when you are not using it 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed To Set a Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level
37. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you WARNING Continued striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not a
38. Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REO RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading desig
39. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard seating positions only The center seating position will accommodate LATCH compatible lower anchorages with flexible webbing mounted attachments only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel th
40. Diesel Lift Red tion Module OCM Pump DSL LIFT M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module PUMP Export Onl Blue RR WIPER MOD Power Mirror Switch Power Folding Mirror PWR MIRR SW PWR FOLD MIR Driver Window M31 20 Amp Back Up Lamps B U Yellow LAMPS ia M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Ignition Switch IGN Red Controller ORC TT SW Window Module EUROPE WIN MOD M33 10 Amp Next Generation Con Red troller NGC Global troller NGC Trans Powertrain Engine mission Feed TRANS Controller GPEC FEED J1962 es ELM Assist PRK ASST Heater Venti lation Air Condition ing Module HVAC MOD Headlamp Wash HDLP WASH Compass COMPAS 10 Amp Heated Mirrors Red 20 Amp Power Outlet 3 Yellow BATT 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Red tem ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP Stop Lamp Switch STP LP SW Fuel Pump Rly Hi Control MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 Cavity Cartridge Mini Fuse Fuse M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors Natural LOCK UNLOCK MTRS CAUTION Description e When installing the integrated power module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in a electrical system failure Continued 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the co
41. E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 450 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More freguent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a
42. Folding Seat Green J10 30 Amp Hdlp Wash Relay J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Pwr Pink Manual Tuning Valve Pink Liftgate Module Passenger Door Node y rm 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Sway Bar J20 30 Amp Front Wiper LO HI THATCHAM Lock Pink Unlock Power Slid J21 20 Amp Front Rear Washer ing Door Module Blue Ignition Off Draw J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module IOD Main Natural EBL Rear Window MI 15 Amp Center High Mounted Defogger Blue Stop Light CHMSL M2 20 Amp Trailer Lighting Starter Solenoid Yellow M3 20 Amp Frt Rear Axle Lockers Powertrain Control Yellow Module PCM Trans MA 10 Amp Trailer Tow Range Red Natural MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 6 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Rain M10 15 Amp Ignition Off Draw Yellow Sensor Blue Vehicle Entertainment 20 Am Power Outlet 2 System IOD VES _ Yellow BATT ACC SELECT sae on eceiver i ae Eet Front Heated Seat DVD Handssbree EN Module HFM RA 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat If DIO Antenna ANT Yellow Equipped Universal Garage Door Opener UGDO Vanity Lamp VANITY LP M11 10 Amp Ignition Off Draw Red IOD HVAC ATC MW SENSR Under hood Lamp UH LMP 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge
43. HE RS 473 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator vee sk kw ede Rees 205 Service Manuals ies 0454044 x ERE e664 475 Setting the Clock va kis ees eases 223 238 240 243 253 Denes Personal ss sesar desia IRR HR 219 Shift Lock Manual Override 298 Shifting Automatic Transmission 299 303 Shoulder Belts 3 3 6 44254 644 54 2446446459544 39 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 286 DIC nals TWT and ues e GER 90 150 195 441 442 443 Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 346 Spot AWS D C 241 388 Specifications Fuel Gasoline ii 2 lt 4 2444448846494 4644 358 Oil wesw eee ee eee ee oe eas eee EAE 408 Speed Control Cruise Control au wese RP 156 PPecGOMICle 24442466005 EP ED BAR Rens ee HE 194 DIAC WINS P EES HAS RR AE ES Ds 293 Cold Weather sas onbe KERRIE 294 Eten Block Heater xu 333 tanadin cad d ebd 296 Engine Fails to Start sore doses ee cons 204 REGIE PP KAS AO AA EER DES DRR a a 25 Steering IE AA OAR og be OE OT EE EI 315 316 TU E Old ep ok eas Bee AE 155 Wheel TII seres spero AER demora ENE 155 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound DOSE CONN se uc xa a t s en Ed as oo vic AP DEE ERGE AAR AR AE es AO O DI sies n ae A RA PARS HR mea ma lorode VOMO cac x AR ARE HASE EX ARA sands BUD Kool ss ok are KERSE SERE DIES ee es Sun Visor Extension Sunroof Maintenance 494 INDEX NEE Id Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 54 byntlieuc Eng me C acusados
44. Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the d
45. HomeLink PUO 254 eo ae oe ooops oa ene ee eS 170 PCCW rm 170 O Troubleshooting Tips 00 170 O General Information 171 W Power Sunroof If Equipped I O Opening Sunroof Express 172 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M D Opening Sunroof Manual Mode D SET AO OE EES EI EE TERES 178 O Closing Sunroof Express 172 O Glove Box Storage Compartment 178 oO Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 179 O Front Storage Compartment 178 Piel Protect Featite iese sod yx 173 O Console Storage Compartment 179 E inch Protect Ovenide osse sae 2 dedos 173 Wo res Beatles wa os wal ER DEd RAS 180 O Venting Sunroof Express 173 EG teo see gk trarre igk ERR eR HE 180 El Sunshade Operation s ideas hoe RR e 1 H Cargo Tie Down Hooks i s ses Ee ea n 180 bi Wind DUFeUDe sos se ER ER Sages SEERDE 174 B Cargo Load Floor If Equipped 182 O Sunroof Maintenance acaso oa To HER 174 W Rear Window Features 183 O Ignition Off Operation 0 174 O Rear Window Wiper Washer 183 W Electrical Power Outlet ese se ee 179 D Rear Window Defroster 184 Mi les m 177 W Roof Trim Applique Non Functional 185 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizonta
46. INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Enable Disable the Rear Park Assist System The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with turned ON or turned OFF through the EVIC to make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating information Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears Compass
47. Menu press the Voice Command vr button and say Help or Main Menu NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command EVR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vn button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed
48. Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Plug Module GLW PLG MOD Export Diesel Only M12 30 Amp _ Amplifier AMP M15 20 Amp COL MOD IR SNS Green Yellow Heater Ventilation 13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Air Conditioning Yellow Cabin Compartment Automatic Tempera Node IOD CCN ture Control HVAC Wireless Control ATC Rearview Module WCM SI Mirror RR VW MIR REN Clock Module Cabin Compartment CLK MOD Multi Node CCN Transfer function Control Case Switch I CASE Switch MULTIFCTN SW RUN ST Multi SW function Control M1 0 Amp Trailer Tow Export Switch MULTIFTCN Yellow Only SW Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Glow MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fus Fuse Fuse Fuse M16 0 Amp Occupant Restraint M20 Cabin Compartment Red Controller Occupant Node Interior Light Classification Module CCN INT LIGHT ORC OCM Switch Bank SW BANK Steering Con trol Module SCM M22 10 Amp Right Horn RT Red HORN HI LOW 25 Amp Auto Shut Down M23 10 Amp Left Horn LT HORN Natural ASD 1 and 2 Red HI LOW M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper REAR Natural WIPER M17 15 Amp Left Tail License Blue Park Lamp LI TAIL Lamp RT TAIL NEM PRK RUN LMP 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fus Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuel Pump FUEL M29 10 Amp Occupant Classifica PUMP
49. ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lecte
50. On doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 2 Acc 4 Start 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Key In lgnition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEYS The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates
51. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Seat Adjustment Recline WARNING To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat at the desired position To return the seatback lift the belt is no longer resting against your chest In a lever lean forward and release the lever collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked 030932725 Seatback Release Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Six Way Driver s Power Seat with Manual This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to Recliner the rear of the power seat switch Pull up on the lever to The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of recline the seatback the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the seat up WARNING or down forward or rearward or to tilt the seat Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the se
52. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the wind shield wiper washer control lever to the first detent and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval 031507503 Front Wiper Control There are five delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of two cycles every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles or from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph 16 km h NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the windshield wiper washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visi
53. To Set the Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector lever in the PARK position Press and hold the CMIC reset button for approximately ten seconds until the current variance zone number is displayed To change the zone press and release the CMTC reset button to increase the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass Prior to calibrat ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and hold the CMTC reset button for approxi mately 10 seconds until the current variance zone num ber is displayed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 3 Release the CMTC reset button then press and hold again for approximately 10 seconds until the direction is displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in the display 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER DiODESAA EVIC IF EQUIPPED
54. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door m trim panel Power Mirror Switch Press the switch to the L left or R right to select a mirror Using one of the four arrows move the mirror to the desired position 030407091 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor 2 Unclip the visor from center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconn
55. When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position 326 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id ESP TCS Indicator Light The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the 5 instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the The Electronic Stability Program ESP cannot pre tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent acci Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the dents including those resulting from excessive speed accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can conditions prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has two avai
56. a new memo During the e Delete All to delete all memos recording you may press the Voice Command EVR System Setup E button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you the following commands may say the following commands Save to save the memo e Language German Continue to continue recording e Language Dutch Delete to delete the recording e Language Italian e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos Language English During the playback you may press the Voice Command vr button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands e Language Spanish e Language French Repeat to repeat a memo e Tutorial Next to play the next memo e Voice Training 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command vr button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command SVR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases whe
57. all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the BRAKE warning light is illuminated Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id should be checked when pads are replaced However WARNING Continued low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in M
58. and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Adjusting Upper bhoulderBel Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position PME FirstRow Row Second ov IE cmi A Latch A Third Row NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting
59. are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch 057005576 system may reduce handling stability and brak ing performance and could result in an accident Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect e Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information 372 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 057005577 057005578 With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect NS TA TING AND OPERATING 373 Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional trailer tow prep package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Rating
60. around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on has a label certifying that it meets all applicable safety standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Except for the second row center seating position all passenger seat belts are equipped with automatic locking retractors The second row center position has a cinching latch plate Both types of seat belts are the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt the cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight However any seat belt system may loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For the second row seat belts with the automatic locking retractors pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow it to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess
61. as follows For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the automatic unlock doors on exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To use the system open each rear door use a flat blade screwdriver or ignition key and rotate the dial counter clockwise to engage the child protection lock and clock wise to disengage the child protection locks When the system on a door is engaged that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position le co 021
62. be used together as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position will withdraw any slack in the belt If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing 022607390 etc Removing Slack From Belt N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder
63. belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioner The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage
64. button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not us
65. button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Using the Panic Alarm NOTE The PANIC and SECURITY alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the PANIC and SECURITY modes to hear the differences in the horn If one should sound in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it To turn the PANIC alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the PANIC alarm is on the headlights and parking lights will fla
66. by briefly pressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP BAS Warning Lamp The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with BAS The ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warn ing Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this lamp remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected ESP BAS NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be on even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation STARTING AND OPERATING 329 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H
67. change Replace as required WARNING mable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system information or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged over materials that can burn Such materials might have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex be grass or leaves coming into contact with your haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams hicle in areas where your exhaust system can or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep contact anything that can burn 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx id CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst a
68. e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 476 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id vehicle system and or components is written in e Owner s Manuals straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve Call toll free at hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by ot eee en ee step troubleshooting and drivability procedures e 1 800 387 1143 Canada proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools Or and equipment Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following t
69. folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160
70. for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 348 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles de pends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed NOTE The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram EE be C EE P 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM T
71. have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a tim
72. heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 397
73. immobilizer 43 5 6 05 dcr DER ES des 14 Keyl Reminder oase ande b x OPE ER has 14 Keyless Entry System s assecc xe Sucka sa He 19 Keys 12 Lane Change ASSIS amp 2u sach 9 bs S deae gres 151 kas Shoulder Bells 5 iw srusp diea ve BE art eas 99 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 6 44 lt 546509 6824 ne4 44 80 81 leni SEPETTE ARE OS FEE EE EN 91 Lead Free Gasoline 2 2x4 ames 358 Leaks Fluid 43 visse 6s 64 4345 624 455 445 91 Life of Tires PME 344 enc 24 seed EE EE EE EN 97 Ch BUDS io ase HRS ERA PE e BES 90 488 INDEX NEE M NN Er 90 147 Hazard Warning Flasher amp 9 2 9 s 386 Duc 6244 SEER EERS RADE OO KERE ED 74 88 200 HesdleHt OWL ausge aub HERPES Haase es 148 Ir PLC RTT 194 P a DES is exu a HARP op de db ied 440 uui pM S 199 High Beam Indicator 4 is dak a Rt ee 194 boek EP uua ben edu d X ucbu d e eae ages 443 Illuminated EIE ais 3o tirar ub reg d 19 Brake Assist Warning lesen 328 Instrument Cluster saat SR ARK yes 148 192 bu ke VERS gonere ED Es DR RE HS os 196 IDIGHOL ase wi SA RSA Ras OER DERDE ES 151 Bulb Replacement 3 24 4 o dh hb DRR 440 Lights On Rem inder is 44442644244 2 RP 149 GEB uc cwseserdeesP bresicrej VORE EE 180 bew EGC sui sR ED GEE EED VR 192195 Center Mounted Stop acu quce dcs MEID N pores 444 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 205 amp TERRE ED EE IIETT 206 OU Piessi os e scemuc a ER P
74. into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset At some point in time it may be necessary to reactivate the auto up feature To do so perform the following procedure 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Button The window lockout button on the driver s door below the power window switches allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCKOUT button To enable the window controls press the window LOCKOUT button a second time 021907386 Window Lockout Button N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICL
75. is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 Defroster Check operation by selecting the def
76. oa AR Door Ajar GALES se 94s beu err Ux geese PE Liftgate Ajar pPASCAD axe EP EGER SS ES E Fuel Cap Fault noFUSE sse Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required LoWASH sse Low Washer Fluid On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus ter this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information ECO ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Press the Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display gASCAP Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged gASCAP will be displayed in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the gASCAP message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may
77. off If its sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn the air conditioning on If its cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 2 COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and sd then turn the air t TY conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 646 oS the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near rf If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and d In very cold weather a if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 Information Provided by DEEFNLER STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures 293 O Normal rare soas icir eeter E SAPE 293 D Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C 0 2 eee Es 294 OE pogine Fals IO Start uio gars gno pease 294 aile NE sad ve ER EE ENS PE 295 lBl Engine Block Heater If Equipped 296 Bl Automatic Transmission 296 O Key Ignition Park Interlock 297 O Brake Transmission Interlock System LH Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override 000 cee ee ee nee D Four Speed Automatic Transmission DALE HEL Dm
78. or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent antifreeze not radiator antifreeze Operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 WARNING into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam cation or oil
79. other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued 3 8 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4
80. perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or pet form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or gualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check th
81. restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts Tether Strap Mounting 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interio
82. result in a 1 mph WARNING 2 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains slippery speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED ParkSense Rear Park Assist is a driver aid that senses for obstacles behind the vehicle and provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEE System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep ParkSense operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will d
83. sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 15 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the y Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remain
84. single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 451 NOTE The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level gr
85. sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupants mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment c
86. supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary
87. the bottom edge of the oil fill hole when the vehicle is in a level position 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout indust
88. the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether under the head rests and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be
89. the convertible top down Phone Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness Bluetooth Communication Link to a large degree rely on the phone and network and Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to not the Uconnect Phone the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connec e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced x pu pbi py Selene te by lowering the in vehicle audio volume pue EO OE OON Tu remain in Bluetooth ON mode 3 e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Hecent Calls Last Enter Enter Number Name Number on Phone is redialed Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Main Menu d ce Emergency eem em Phonebook Francais See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired
90. the heater line on the left side of the engine WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in REVERSE You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicl
91. the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect M Phone compatible
92. the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The Uconnect Phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this si
93. the transfer case will not shift The 4WD Indicator Light located in the display under the tachometer will flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again 2WDs 4WD LOCK Rotate the transfer case switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn ing the switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine either RUNNING or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the key is in the ACC position NOTE e The four wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD 4WD LOCK if the front and or rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the AWD Indicator Light located in the display under the tachometer will flash At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift e Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experi enced due to uneven tire wear low tire pressure or excessive loading ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Spec
94. time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off Whe
95. to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 e If supported this number may be programmable on e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say some systems To do this press the amp button and Towing Assistance say Setup followed by Emergency NOTE e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your The towing assistance number dialed is based on the chances of successfully making a phone call as to that country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 for the cellular phone directly 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside WARNING Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Your phone must be turned on and paired to the the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in Uconnect Phone System to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays pair
96. vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Selection of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than e This vehicle has not been designed for use with the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in decreased corrosion protection and engine damage If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built wi
97. webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint For addi tional information refer to Automatic Locking Mode In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out e f the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Ol
98. when using ParkSense Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Other wise you could damage the sensors when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Vehicles Equipped With the Electronic Vehicle ee eee e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist You can turn ParkSense on or off through the EVIC System it is strongly recommended that the ball Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further towing Failure to do so can result in injury or information damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the Vehicles Equipped with ParkSense Rear Park rear fascia when the warning display turns the red Assist Switch LEDs ON Also the sensors could detect the ball Py Yo
99. 0 RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Pres
100. 0 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib od Occupant 3 160 Ibs AER 100 Ibs 3S Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 337 3
101. 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Aa 030932731 To Lower Rear Seat Rear Seat Release Strap 3 Fold the rear seat completely forward 1 Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of each rear seatback 4 Push down on the seatback to lock it in the folded osition 2 Pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle P N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 To Raise Rear Seat TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD If locked in the folded position pull the release strap To open the hood there are two latches that must be toward the front of the vehicle released Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully of the instrument panel locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its 3 o proper position WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for chil
102. 193 Materie SCC a e vau es ates voa duoi Pts 361 Octane RAUNG lt lt sic oru 2 odes damn ees 358 359 446 NOQUINEMICNIS San g renret MEES ER DE PEE 445 lnk Capaci fae neces y pp ease Bees 445 Fuel System Cado osse sona ieioea haba ee os 362 luno rr 432 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 165 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap seres 364 365 403 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge she nu PER RR RES 192 Gasoline Fuel 486 INDEX NEE Id Gasoline Reformulated 359 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 360 Gauges Coolant Temperature sr bx scbx veg 192 Duel 143392 3 2048 ENT X EST Uds 192 Gomuc c MT 202 PPCCUOMICte sis RR e dp PEE RP AUS ee a cn 194 Tachometer i 46 4 399 HA RR HARE HR R3 200 CERIN soes ers PES HERE SAO DER 304 General Information 17 129 358 lies le ONS so see Re CREE eR VEE E Sw oe MO 431 Gross Axle Weight Rating 366 369 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 366 368 ONR os pee be eee ey eee 366 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 100 Hazard Warning Flasher 2222 2 Rss 386 Head Restraints 4s Ee 44 KERR RAO ER EE YS 138 Head Rests REELE EREREK ERAS N BE BED rs 138 Headlights Bulb Replacement a 2 9 2099999 BOERPERD RS 440 Dimmer SWIK pretresi dei e gas iW edd 149 EE ie ATR RT OE OT EE ON 440 ud PHP OR AE AE RS EE n 148 Inscite leoi PP 141 FGM wea ER TER OE OE TEE EE ne oe as 275 Heater Engine Block 222 eas RS OES 296 Hitches Trailer TOWING
103. 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www Siriuscanada ca for
104. 3 kcu ALS EER SEE 389 O Two Wheel Drive Vehicles 997 O Preparations For Jacking 389 B Four Wheel Drive Vehicles 398 386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN id HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning Flasher switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate action e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped put transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with
105. 376 a EEEELLLLIIIILLIIIIIIUULIULLUIIIUIIILELIULILLLHLIILLL XAIkLLLSAALLUEGGTIGH GAG xoLAAUINLOAGAILLIL UOOULU LA ICUGIILILOLKeAA INDEX 495 Torque Converter Clutch usus 2644544 ER 303 307 TOE succes EIE PE RU PURA REIN Re P E 268 24 Hour Towing Assistance 115 Disabled Vehicle 2 2 2 ucc dor E op i hosce N 397 CUE sie oru duce xe A RNC a d Rus de d dci 374 ISGeredtofldl 544446404006 RED EE ORE HER 363 WICK RIP 374 TOWING Assistance skik s dereud onm iiis 115 Traction Control wee vee eee eed TE 198 323 Trader TOWING osse AREA Sate REM eee Gos 368 Cooling Systemi TIPS cosa ure RR KORT YES 383 li LES 44 354 Gehan ba heehee GERS Ek DAD Mmimum Requirements saca sa cem DR EE N N 377 Trailer and Tongue Weight 376 WINS PR SH 380 Trauer Towing GUI sae VER Xo RERO en 374 Trailer JUS NP oed uo PES S eed DER Eee eee DE X 374 TANE TIT 296 m WONL P KERE AE GR AR ODE 296 Epos 3299999 23399 2f S DE 296 Transfer Case kwa 545 HE EE PROF REAR SAS 426 PIG ges ee ae ao Bare oo Pee oe es 426 447 Maintenance SS SS SS eee eee A26 Transmission lt 3 4a cewek ae 909 3 ER RR xo 299 303 Automatic lt s 6 4 5655 x RE So Oe ROS ERE 299 303 BIC 22 929 oe a ee oa eS eas EA 94 447 Maintenance 00 cece ee eee ee 425 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless EMY iae 24 rede eee ers 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 165 Tread Wear Indicators 00000 343 ye
106. 38 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 339 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life res
107. 4 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Replace accessory drive belt s a m a a m E d Hd m d M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service 126 Months Maintenance Sched
108. 45 DUBUIBHIE porpre ie ii peia ee ese T S 409 MIBCOSID 23554008 ot cocoa WES RE ES 409 445 Onboard Diagnostic System 403 404 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 165 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Outside Rearview Mirrors sis ESE xh awa 98 Overdrive 4 440646 ete SES x 200 301 306 Overdrive OFF Switch ss ss Rcx 301 306 Overheating ENE UIE 2562545526 44682645 192 386 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 475 ati Cane er 428 Palit DEE ooie du tev etch tees ee dE S 428 Pane A Ift 2s adenosine RES ER UE SX Rob orans 29 Park Sense System Rear 4 ss Ee Eg ER 3s 159 Fak DOKO ways kie den an EE Ha DR RE 917 Parking On HUL ssa ertoe ve ayes x exe TS 917 laseu1e Eie AE EE HEP EIER tee eee seen 149 leon oe 6 54 2 64 86 au shee MESES 219 o A ees eee bbe da Rhee ages 85 D EEEELIIIIIIIIIIIIIIILLLLLILILLISIULIILII ICIHLLA LOCLIONLLEL IUTLIDBOLOEBA LLUL L LULU LU UIjUAU 4L LAUQGUGAGAI OL S INDEX 491 Pets ans pOr 95293 24919 ELE 59952943 85 Phone Cellular iss annaa aaa 100 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 100 Placard Tire and Loading Information 334 Polishing and Waxing iis soda e e hs 429 Power POOR LOCKS ss as ar auu ote ne AG HEAD d HG 29 MITON 2 iue x deco 256 46556508 d AR ew dd 99 vc a P TET 315 316 OO Pm 171 nn TEER OE DE ey bees 33 Power bleeting Fuld au oca 45h45 044 HAD ER 447 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 53 Preparation for Jacking
109. 6 you can press the vm button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the EVR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the EVR button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop
110. 7 283 Windshield Washers 152 154 414 DIO AA SERE EE OE EE 414 Windshield Wiper Blades 414 Windshield Wipers ss SE SE SS SE ee ee 152 Wiper DECAY S 154 WIDE Nea soera x REEL AX YS x EI E eee 4s 183 Wipers Intermittent ace RERO PE d 3 Rea PE 154 Wrecker TOWNE P PC 397 SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10KA74 126 AC 8rd Edition Printed in U S A f Lan um La Ga 6 amp
111. 807374 Child Protection Door Lock NOTE e When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi tion After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front 9221207383 J passenger rear passenger doors which operates the front Power Window Switches passenger rear passenger door windows The window The power window switches remain active for up to controls will operate only when the ignition switch isin 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF the ON or ACC position For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC this feature is programmable
112. API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity 4 0L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred SAE 5W 30 engine oil is allowed during cold weather only to improve cold weather starting Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscrimi
113. Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset
114. C posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the
115. E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Information Provided by DEEFNLER IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Velde iss UP 471 Speech Impaired TDD TTY sten 473 O Prepare For The Appointment 471 EESOPUIOO CONUOC 42604454 spe ed OS 473 EPE pae hist s sacco drew e m qo ed CR RR 471 Wi Warranty Information 474 H Be Reasonable With Requests 471 W MOPAR Parts sesse Eum rr REPE Di 474 N If You Need Assistance 471 W Reporting Safety Defects 474 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 472 O In The 50 United States And Washington O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 472 PENAL A Re TA BET BE me En Mexico Contact ss acca eae eames e nedi 472 Oln Canada ee ee EE eee eee 475 470 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id W Publication Order Forms 475 El Tra lion Grades 45445445 ce md tarit ti 477 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Temperaire Grades a ge ed oa EOS dr eo ee d 478 Quality Grades as 4 Shes AR EA P EROR RE E OE 477 O DreadWeaf 225 9294a4 SERE SE rarse 477 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 471 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to
116. E 37 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate 022232710 Liftgate Release WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers f
117. ERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming Homel ink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indica tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
118. General Information a 69 5 0 EP RY dem dra E 250 Mi iS osos nee EIERS AAS HEDE ED 97 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 W Occupant Restraints EE SE Ee se 38 O How Io Use Remote Start skoue see fu 25 O Lap Shoulder Belts SE 9d NB AE s duces RIES ERTS od 28 D Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 41 E Manual Door Locks s uu eaa Rr EE ERES 28 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 45 Power Door Locks s suena see me RS 29 Hi Saat Bell Pretensioner ii ei oce ire orden 45 A Automate Door LOKS csveesi gud p ES ES 29 o Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 45 H Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit 30 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 46 D Child Protection Door Lock System Rear 0 Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode o ee a EE eee TE ONE FOK 31 E aap d C3 ER PRED ads 47 MVVINGOWS ess sous C400 EE TE ERR 5 33 O Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR 48 O Power Windows sis goa BERE GED dde d 33 O Energy Management Feature 52 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System EC Wld Kestane 4344264554053 eave oo 76 RE 9s Mi Engine Break In Recommendations 86 EDEN Doe Eb ore wed ania RD De oF W Safety Tips EEN EE EE EE N 86 P a EE stud Pe H fransportimeg Passengers swa we vaca wha 86 Ted Belt Eleidlel as os ii ia ERK dou 54 ma EE N 97 BUE piena Rectan ee B Safety Checks You Should Make I
119. KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 334 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location EF ox e NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 1 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCC N on the driver S side B Pillar NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR b 5 2 SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Tire Placard Location NS TA TING AND OPERATING 335 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size
120. LL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in th
121. M METHOD 89 800dfab7 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components 360 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the count
122. M x 1000 Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 24 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maint
123. Maintenance O Body DuDECOBOIE 25 SEER ERA AR RR RSG o Windshield Wiper Blades 414 H Adding Washer Fluid sss 414 HExhaust5ystel 14 492 Ges eee eee 33 415 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Id ACHOE OVIEN erir ke cH ce hae ete ue E 417 Elise cc D rcr 423 D Automatic Transmission 425 oO Transfer Case PC 426 O Front Rear Axle Fluid anaana anaana aa 427 D Appearance Care And Protection From COMOSIOW 2050 ad pod eee ERA EIE OER KA 428 fu PR 432 H Totally Integrated Power Module W Replacement Bulbs 440 W Bulb Replacement sees 440 Pledge ord 2 vox s 9E C9 des ne Roh RUE 440 O Left Front Turn Signal a 59 expe fS d 441 ARENON Hasie BO acest sous SP p 2s 442 D Front Side Marker ss ss ss se 442 O Front Fog Lamp Front Fascia Mounted 442 O Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup IF Pm 443 O Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Sel bos SE AR RUE ES ESOS EIS 444 E Fluid Capacities 22i eR EUER 445 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 446 ELE GE MIE ru 446 ENG HAS AC AA7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L v i se SA FEE N 971007127 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 1 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 Integrated
124. Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate TUNE SCROLL 042305233 Media Center 130 RES RSC Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command
125. O KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision 2 This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The m o UNUM EE E a seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags 02 17711 Front Airbag Components 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag NOTE Inflatable Curtains SABIC that run the entire length of e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim the headliner to protect the driver front and rear pas but they will open during airbag deployment OE OE tea e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be eguipped with the following airbag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel 022632712 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Label Location e Drive
126. OW HAUL Indicator If Equipped The TOW HAUL button is located on the gear shift bezel This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected TOW 12 Turn Signal Indicators Ca The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about 1 mile 1 6 km with the turn signals on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 13 Transmission Temperature Warning Light If Equipped This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEU TRAL until the light goes off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M WARNING Continued operation with the Transmission Tem perature Warning Light illuminated could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components causing a fire that may result in personal injury 14 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and par
127. PMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that NS TA TING AND OPERATING 349 when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltal
128. Power Module 5 Battery 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 0L 071210704 1 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Engine Oil Fill 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Coolant Reservoir 4 Integrated Power Module 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter da
129. Pues Pre DE EE 199 La Eme RUNNIN os tes sa BR Ea Rx Pob ES E I5 Passe 24225 REEDE BERE EE RR ARE 149 Dimmer Switch Headlight uu esee cca Soe as 149 crue cula m 443 Electronic Stability Program ESP leur Db oe ER OE ed hiems 443 Indicator eee 194 326 Seat Belt Reminder 193 Engine Temperature Warning 193 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 194 EXIGHOE so oso tel deca oes es benea PS S P 90 23i C EER EE EE EK 440 FOG o rrr 150 199 442 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 205 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 207 Side Marker i252 32 22 R260 igini kerid 443 a EEEEELLLLLLIIIIIILUIGIIIILIIIIIILUILLUILIDS uL LAGAU IAGDLILLIIULLILLGGGGI A C Gu INDEX 489 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 194 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 200 348 Tracor CONMO oo e542 dente C E 326 lum Signal soas dor KEER RE 90 150 441 442 443 io ER OE EE EE TE 198 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 192 load Floor CADO use gares 9p a tees EUR SS aby 182 Loading Veli l ados d dede ERAS d i 366 jo EO EE HEER OT T 334 Ee neo ER EE FO ETER e 28 Chile Pi6 le uon sace eee s PES FERES EE 9l Do T 28 go Doo TER 29 Low Tire Pressure DySI BY 23 3 2E AR RR EER ED 348 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren ULAICID 222 92223425 ddi 52929 IE OR ee 80 81 b bricatot DOdV srs e243s aa me IR b Ea PES 413 eee C anl auctus eee eee E Rer TREES 185 Mainten
130. R 366 chanem A Fal DO a oes vx PER POP IS DES 388 Chiat Tie EE si vis Ge Re nh de eee oe RR 330 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 205 404 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 86 CHECKS ale D 86 Child Restraint SS 76 77 81 83 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 80 81 Child Saleh LOCKS PD IR 31 Climate onto is ESEL EE EA BE RES 2 9 TOT uus e 555 ENE DE E Pes 223 238 240 243 253 Com Holder sessie KORES BEER S 179 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 274 Compact opare DE 2a agen Shanes BORS DS RE 341 COMPASS 3 659 9 d REEDS DR 4458008 207 210 216 Compass Calibration e ss ART HARE 210217 Compass Variance s s sedia Re n 209 218 Computer Tip Travel sad 250 DRR SERA eiae 215 Be ie AR ET AE EE Eee ee ews 179 Console FOr eaux xus ee ante ae EAT 179 Contract Service eee 473 Sono AOO TETT TETEP TETTETETT 417 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 419 COO apa oues ecc it e os d 445 Coolant Level 4244404564 OES HE RAS ES RAS 421 Disposal of Used Coolant 421 Drain Flush and Refill 418 lo sero rr EE 417 Points to Remember ss 422 Pressure Cap 6 64 56283530555 ES ERR RUPES 420 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 418 445 446 Corrosion Protection ec ke p SEER ERK ER 428 a EEEELLSSIIILGIIIIGUUIGUIIIIIIIULIUZCILCLLILELOLLOEUIOA U DIAGIGGLO ELLTL GILIALLLGoL AAB
131. R sadi 71 ANDIE ICAL uas es oe he SC TE RE RS es 74 88 200 Abas Maintenance eu ea i e044 464 be 25 eet es 73 Airbag Window Side Curtain 59 Alum ICME oos OSSE on oe OR RE RR 99 194 Alarm Paic 22v nue 64 SOS KORO RE EEO ES 29 Alarm S c rity Alarm a sone gencre ph S ui 17 Alarm System Security Alarm iW Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio 265 270 Antifreeze Engine Coolant sisie cer sees 445 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 319 322 Anti Lock Warming Light cxceesdeestvue sees 199 ANG TREM ste ao iaa a a E DE a 17 PPC ANC CUI sa future potis mre Tiei 428 Mosistance TOWING 2041984424566 PES PARAR RS 115 Auto Down Power Windows 34 Automatic Dimming Mirror iaces 566454 Eyes 98 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 279 Automatic Transaxle 0000000 296 Automatic Transmission 299 303 425 Fluid and Filter Changes adea see ee n d ee 425 Fluid Level Check ases EER EER RR RR ES 425 NN INDEX 481 Iud IE 3252253452299 29 5 25 92 295 425 447 Special AOUIIVES 293 9 4 9 9 40d HEER RS 426 dor diie CONVENCE 2st eens deg dac pure s s 303 307 wc PP 305 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 175 Auxiliary Power Outlet sies we ES ue hax RR ES 175 Pode TIO x22 0455222022934 eta ces m pras 447 DANCIN Bae Sue p wb eere ER WE EER E Edad edd 411 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE
132. RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR
133. RTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag In flator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity and type The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC The Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC may deploy during rollovers and collisions where the impact is confined to a pa
134. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programm
135. Se uie RAAR nex ea EER oes Pat 207 Tap Odometer 4 sien k ted CER Re RR SE i 202 Trip Odometer Reset Button 206 Turn Signals 24545 44454 25 Res 150 195 441 442 443 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 100 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 496 INDEX M Universal Transmitter 2004 165 Upholstery Care acea EER HORSE PR oy CREE Ord 431 Marie MITOL ans suce dos a dex PER see ae s 100 Variance Compass voa da ee aee ohn 455 209 218 Vehicle Certification Label 366 Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle Loading es resimi ro i hes 335 366 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 VERE SlOiASE CT 285 MISEOSID UNO OM 65 sis oe BUS KODE ES den 409 Voice Recognition System VR 129 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 192 Warnings Boll OVer uu socks x iei exce bd Sands 4 Warnings and Cautions 4 4 nie ER bo t I mace wd 7 Warranty Information 4 3 2 9279 PRE Re 474 Washers Windshield 152 154 414 Waxing and Polisbl g ss sae gto bes KAR Rees 429 Wheel and Wheel Trim sess 430 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 430 Wheel Mounting 24s obs ASE AO EE DEE 393 Mine DUMCUNS sonar 9 9 AUS KEER und 37 174 WINDOW LOSSE aita ees N Dara Sod Eb ea 286 Windows a AA AE 5 44 EE EE EEN SEG 33 POUWBIP oa cu oa Van SERS OE EES GE HA DER V 33 Windshield Defroster 89 27
136. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains as tightly as possible and then TIRE CHAINS retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Use Class S chains or other traction aids that meet SAE Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Type S specifications CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as bumps especially with a loaded vehicle recommended by the chain manufacturer Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 CAUTION Continued e Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower sug gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires NOTE The use of class S chains is permitted with P235 65R17 and P225 75R16 tires CAUTION Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with tires other than P235 65R17 and P225 75R16 tires There may not be adequate clearance
137. System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds
138. T button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly s
139. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e System Status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Tire Pressure Monitor System if equipped e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass display e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e Uconnect gps system screens if equipped e Audio mode display The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Uconnect gps if equipped Sys tem Status and Personal Settings Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection Also the FUNCTION SELECT but ton changes the current CD track being played if equipped when the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen Press the SCROLL button to scroll through VW Navigation if equipped System Status Mes sages and Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features MENU O Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to display one o
140. The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push
141. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti lized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire NS TA TING AND OPERATING 379 replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated br
142. VEHICLE NN Id Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subje
143. Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEDIA CENTER 230 REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate dd AE AE AA Pas add C I QU L2 5 DISC WPS WHA 042005200 Media Center 230 REQ Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you rel
144. X A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 045607534 Automatic Temperature Control Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dialin the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain that level automati cally using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment 045607537 You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72 F 22 C for the average pe
145. acement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 26 Odometer Trip Odometer Display Area The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the odometer ECO te aie Mook s ibus Fuel Saver Indicator Off ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator On OOP RC EE APE RU
146. ach time the engine is started Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in second gear in any forward driving range To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn the engine off and turn the key to the LOCK position NS TA TING AND OPERATING 303 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Only second gear range will operate in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your autho rized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages Five Speed Automatic Transmission 4 0L Engine The electronically cont
147. ain taining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder Continued reservoir Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 WARNING Continued Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could fluid be damaged causing partial or complete brake CAUTION failure This could result in an accident Automatic Transmission Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration Fl
148. ait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure 204 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C WARNING Continued To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures the use of an externally powered electric engine block heater Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get available from your authorized dealer is recommended it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the If Engine Fails to Start WARNINCG e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued NS TA TING AND OPERATING 295 CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is
149. ake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg 380 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher WARNING Continued e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The trailer tow package may include a four pin and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness STARTING AND OPERATING 381 The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but y
150. ales Defects Reporting vase sie dead AU nri 474 Safety Exhaust Gas ux 2424484 4444485 e vx vox 87 Datety Information HIE sea sak ye bows 029 Datel Mids m 86 Satellite Radio Antenna 265 270 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 268 Schedule Maintenance leen 450 Seat belt Reminder 24462444042 x3 60496044 52 Seat Belts ERA BRIT EER DAAR eas AU 39 88 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 45 And Pregnant WOMEN is 99 54 KOR RR oe oes 53 Child Restraint naasna aaaea 76 83 Extender P T es 54 PODE ed 220 by 9399 9 DE REEN EDE 8e 39 IMSPCCHUOW PP 88 Maine EE Sauces LE AREAS ose eae ee DI 432 Shoulder Belt Anchorage s Re RR 45 oc T dees sees Gage 134 AJUDE AA EE cad ee MEE e ooa 135 Head Restraints esenea OO Bong EE 138 ICAI 244 xa eee ee vache RR HA BARE 141 Real BONOS gueata pao ea RE goss Bee Pi 142 Reel ie vae eX S oe oe eg eee S PP 136 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 446 Selection Or CIL xo sos o9 359 3 99 0 Seek eee EE 408 Sentry Key Immobilizer v a ney RR eee se RES 14 Sentry Key Programming 224 2024 Roe ARIE RR EE 16 a EEEEEELIILLLLILIIIULIILIIIILGIILLLIIILILILLLIBCLL LITL UIAAUUGILUG GQGA 4GGcoTI OGLPNAULLIe INDEX 493 Sentry Key Replacement 15229 94 34x bp 15 Service Assistance ss Es Es SS SS Se 471 Service CONMACE dune a Bard Er d Ex oa IR RAD
151. also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following proce dure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If nec
152. ance bree Battery waa mis ek Eed Ee EER 411 Maintenance Procedures een 406 Maintenance Schedule lt lt 42 22 ls 45 Maintenance Sunroof SE 174 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 205 404 Manual Service 05 i056 ver qu aree E Sx EE 475 Manual Transmission Lubricant Selection rss 447 Master Cylinder Brakes swel ee Vei Rs 423 Mini Irip Compiler saaier oie ES os nee ens 207 215 MIOS 2 2 oo aw OT ONE EE SEE EE TIT 97 Automate IE NE s saae spa 82 BEER ER bs 98 Electric Powered leen 99 QI mi REELE AE ESE DE OE SR HERE 98 Rearview 0 0 0 0 SS ss Se gy ia TESE EE ESS 100 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor lite Pressure System 4s wr EY ES 348 Mop POLS a ase Ge Boe oe Eb dte eo eee oes 406 474 490 INDEX NEE Id Multi Function Control Lever 147 New Vehicle Break In Period 86 Occupant ReSIramis das SEA eee RD HA a wes 38 Occupant Restraints Sedan 59 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 959 959 Odometer jio ca Gages dou a oes ee ag Shee ee ew ae es 206 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 311 Off Road Driving Off Pavement oll Di ESE 23 saan ateed AUG PS betes EE 407 446 Capa ACC 445 bru C v 407 Filter ETT 410 446 IGentincatiOn LOBO ea RA RR iaaa roe d 408 Materials Added to SS SS SS SS eee 409 Recommendation een 408 4
153. and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sensor is located 040506040 Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi mately two seconds NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 3 Press the SCROLL button until the Compass Vari ance message and the last variance zone number dis plays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press a
154. annot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How the Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact 022607508 Be Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle
155. ar 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 4 0L Engine Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Front Axle SAE 80W 90 Multi Purpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent Rear Axle SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Information Provided by DEEFNLER MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS N Emissions Control System Maintenance 450 O Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 450 M A N T
156. at may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must 312 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in 23 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in 50 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 in 50 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine transmission axle transfer case to assure they have not been contaminated Con taminated fluids and lubricants milky foamy in appear ance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage Driving In Snow Mud and Sa
157. at s path 030932728 Power Seat Switches 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Adjusting Active Head Restraints The front passenger seatback can be folded flat to allow Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in for extended cargo space Pull up on the lever to fold the event of a rear impact The Active Head Restraint down the seatback should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 030907652 Fold Flat Passenger Seat lZ v FP E Adjusted Head Restraint N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint on some models you may need to press the push button To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e n the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things to Know Befo
158. ay the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button fo
159. bility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use Mist Feature Push downward on the windshield wiper washer con trol lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever 031507504 Mist Control TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt lever is located on the steering column below the turn signal lever 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Push the lever down to unlock the steering column With WARNING one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Pull the lever up to lock Do not adjust the steering column while driving the column firmly in place Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause Te se the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than
160. bulb Left Front Turn Signal Access Door 3 Disconnect the electrical connector 1 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right full right lock 4 Twist the bulb counter clockwise to remove 2 Remove the door in the left wheel liner by twisting counter clockwise Access to the bulb can be gained through the wheel liner hole 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Right Front Turn Signal e Pull the grille assembly toward you to disconnect the grille clips to the fender and the headlamp ball op DEE oo studs to the front end module 2 Reach behind the headlight unit in the engine com 3 Disconnect electrical connector partment to access the turn signal bulb 3 Twist the bulb counterclockwise to remove EE DE DERE EED ONS 4 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the POR Ped Lamp TrA Fasia MOUNTER bulb 1 Reach between the front fascia and wheel liner from Front Side Marker under the vehicle 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the front fog lamp bulb one quarter turn coun terclockwise to remove from housing 2 Remove the grille assembly as follows 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb a Remove eight fasteners b Remove two screws from each headlamp c Remove two rivets from the center of the grille d Remove one push pin from the top of each fender MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
161. buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of
162. by lack of engine management or brake thermal model 17 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 18 SERV Service 4WD Indicator If Equipped The SERV 4WD Indicator Light will come on SERV when the ignition key is turned to the ON 4WD ius position and will stay on for two seconds If the light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required 19 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light G This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventiona
163. c additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel 362 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s Most of these products contain high concentra performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance a
164. cant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or STARI position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func tion Reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped COMPASS Button The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside tempera ture NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not up
165. cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Command in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle For Uconnect Voice Command refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Sat
166. ct to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console L Power Sunroof Switch 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e Never leave unattended children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may re
167. d Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET
168. d or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the eo button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX NOTE f f ph his f EL ES ES e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they when the vehicle is not in motion are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to e Press the amp button to begin the Uconnect Phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone epu Reo DIGNIDAD hel wa EE y NN F P Phonebook Edit Ow
169. d or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer 150 Months Maintenance to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions Service Schedule warranty L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter WARNING L1 Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter _1 Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine _J Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes L1 Inspect the transfer case fluid e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H
170. d seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury 031332764 Hood Release Lever 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 2 Push the safety latch lever to the right It is located between the grille and hood opening left of the center Ee To prevent possible damage e Do not slam the hood to close it e Lower the hood to approximately 6 in 15 2 cm above the closed position and drop the hood to latch it e Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged NOTE Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip before closing hood to prevent damage to grille 031332767 Safety Latch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the oe ase parking lights headlights headlight beam selection Multifunction Lever passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Headlights and Parking Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first
171. d toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor N Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control i
172. dated when the vehicle is not moving ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The ECO message will display below the outside tem perature in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the calibration mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press
173. der Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f th
174. detent for parking lights and instrument panel lights Turn to the second detent for headlight operation 031407548 Headlight Switch To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or down NOTE If the driver s door is left open and the head lights or parking lights are left on a chime will sound Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beams Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beams Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle wit
175. did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following trip functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Flapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the trip computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will con tinue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a signifi
176. dio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 w
177. e Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed 298 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal pressed To operate the shift lock manual override perform the following steps 1 Turn the key to the ON position but do not start the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Pre
178. e Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in REVERSE You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking REVERSE brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only movement and possible injury or damage after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Continued NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Tow ing in Starting and Operating and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range is used for most city and highway driving 2 Second This range is used for moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to second gear Will not shift into third gear
179. e only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edite
180. e Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 350 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage ma
181. e ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and CAUTION multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert ejected before a new disc can be loaded a second CD if one is already loaded l l l ED l Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio other side is a CD should not be used and they ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 can cause damage to the player NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJEC
182. e Or All Wheel Drive aM Trailer lowing us N ET OE N ees 368 Models eis EA ES ESE DRIE RS MES DI 384 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 293 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNINCG Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Tip Start Feature Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position w
183. e Vehicles M Four wheel drive vehicles must be towed with all four Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed ground at more than 30 mph 50 km h or for more CAUTION than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Towing this vehicle using any other method could result in extensive damage to the transfer case and or transmission Such damage is not covered by the If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km New Vehicle Limited Warranty or faster than 30 mph it must be towed on a flatbed Rear Wheels Raised The vehicle may be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL the ignition key in the LOCK position the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 3 7L 401 N Engine Compartment 4 0L 402 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 403 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 403 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance LIOBPOUS viewed uas HER E ER Ede Pa 404 B Replacement Parts ES ES Se A06 W Dealer Service EE Se ss ee A06 Bl Maintenance Procedures A06 aie ai OU REEN Pos o 407 E Engige UL PEG s apud x v 0 90x 1 24 CR RR OR 410 O Engme Air Cleaner Filter ms a xac sema 410 O Maintenance Free Battery isses ha 411 O Air Conditioner
184. e adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM B
185. e airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Occupant Classification System OCS The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle It is designed to turn off the passenger Advanced Front Airbag for an empty seat and for occupants classified in a category other than an adult This could be a child teenager or even an adult NOTE Children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e Occupant Classification System OCS The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle It is designed to turn off the passenger Advanced Front Airbag for an empty seat and for occupants classified in a category other than an adult This could be a child teenager or even an adult NOTE Children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e Occupant Classification Module OCM The OCM is located beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories ba
186. e engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Id CAUTION American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months CAUTION whichever occurs first Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the Engine Oil Selection chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is For best performance and maximum protection for all not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are
187. e fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate 318 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE id NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound the parking brake Always apply the parking to alert the driver Fully release the pa
188. e or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the vr button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the VR button during
189. e panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility One side features a plastic lined tray which can hold a variety of items The maximum load capacity of the load floor is 400 Ibs 181 Kg The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches In order to use the cargo load floor use the following procedure 1 Push both side mounted release handles toward the center of the vehicle at the same time to release cover 035407095 Floor Panel 2 Lift the cover 3 Flip the cover over and lock panel back into position N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 OOOO f mmus 031507505 Load Floor Rear Wiper Washer Control REAR WINDOW FEATURES N Rotate the switch upward to the first detent posi a f i Rear Window Wiper Washer tion tor rear wiper operation The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch NOTE The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode located on the control lever The control lever is located only on the right side of the steering column 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear activate the rear washer The washer pump will window defroster only when the engine is operating continue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before CAUTION returning to the set position 5 P Failure to fol
190. e road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 7L Engine All engines are designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800d ab6 line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING Rey METHOD 4 0L Engine The 4 0L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING R
191. e shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted attach ments
192. e wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 CAUTION Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Operat ing for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Continued 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and
193. e windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the button to turn recirculate
194. eading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 456 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 457 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8
195. ean RE E 4 409 System Remote Starting ers cirera nes esri dx 25 TE RONE T os bas e ds RA ORE EE SA Eu 200 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 279 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 122 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 80 Tie Down Hooks Cargo sr au ers fiev x ces 180 Tut Steering CONTA sss eee e rend ato HE 155 ico AC PETIT 293 Tire and Loading Information Placard 334 Tire Identification Number TIN Bez Te ME KIES poet d eor acid RA BE DER OR AC Sd QU 329 Tire Satety Information s xu dd om e goa 540544 329 VCS Gye rr 90 338 477 Mg ACC 339 Gur 6 5 4 5 6 5 EED EE ETES 346 dicia C DES 388 Compact DAG va uit PEST SE CERE RED 341 General INfOmmavOn auc 45 oo 1069 Pad KERK RES 338 tiek eed ian bas nore a dodo Ga eee dil DS 341 Inflation Pressures 0 0 00 00000 339 JAK Banta eis RE EE ORR E 388 LECO lie PPP 344 Load CODOOID 2524335442 05 04 00 DRAAK 334 335 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 348 Pressure Warmin Lieb cessceesuwes teres 200 Quality Grading 4 2d dog macie HEL Bur cane 2 477 I MD 341 Replacement 2ineees RY 9T ESL RE PUER 345 RO HOR ies use da P a E V RUE RE oe RR EA RE 347 Dele Ac 329 Dp A 330 Pe diie si EE E IS OPE RE HER BUS RS 388 DOWNING 24545 eo ORE dS oo Se PER ERR EE 342 Tread Wear Indicators 4 59 bd heb e REUTERS 343 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight
196. ease it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin t
197. eat assembly contains critical com ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id The following requirements must be strictly adhered to Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired AI ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by Chrysler Group LLC Mopar At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC Mopar WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli sion A modifi
198. econds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm To Lock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and the liftgate If the ignition is OFF when the doors are locked the parking lights will flash once and the horn will sound a single chirp Sound Horn with Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information e On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a
199. ect Phone NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e WWw jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is Bluetooth Hands Free driven through your Profile cellular phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All at
200. ection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of th
201. ed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and ignition for unauthorized operation When the Vehicle Security Alarm is activated the alarm pro vides both audible and visual signals The horn will sound repeatedly for three minutes while the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an addi tional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and Sec
202. ed by hot engine motion coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough Engine Coolant Checks idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id garden hose vertically down the face of the A C con denser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper
203. ed e Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters s Hazard ewitchoott away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed could cause serious injury or death e Ignition key removed from ignition switch To Enter Remote Start e Battery at an acceptable charge level Press and release the REMOTE START button e RKE PANIC button not pressed 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn WARNING will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode Continued N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle Remote start will also cancel if any of
204. ed to the Uconnect Phone System Towing Assistance references If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VR button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4
205. ed vehicle may not comply with re quired Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FM VSS and or Canadian Standards CMVSS Motor Vehicle Safety N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and
206. elected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio names and folder names is limited For large numbers Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal of files and or folders the radio may be unable to CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files display the file name and folder name and will assign Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after a number instead With a maximum number of files writing are most likely multisession disc
207. elf normal position to return to low beam 9 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 10 Electronic Stability Program ESP Warning Light I Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light If Equipped The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible NOTE The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is actively operating ESP BAS N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be beneficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in acci dent 11 T
208. ellite Radio Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES TM If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer
209. ely manner 472 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN id This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e f for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 473 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has acces
210. em if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Latch Anchorages In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear position located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint For the outboard seating positions route the tether underneath the head rest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat Finally tighten all three
211. enance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re pl
212. equipped e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language
213. equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Clea
214. er EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 81826bed STARTING AND OPERATING 355 Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 356 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id 81826bd7 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes
215. er also is stamped into the right front Vehicle Identification Number door sill under the molding and appears on the Auto NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 8 INTRODUCTION NN Id VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A Word About Your Keys sesse ss ee 12 o To Disarm The System lues 18 O Ignition Key Removal 4 4 22 ER EE ske 12 W laminated Entry 2e Rx dotes 19 oO Key In Ignition Reminder 14 W Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Sentry RE EE RT OE nee 14 3 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 20 EL Replacement Keys osa essen e dr 48495840 15 B To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 21 O Customer Key Programming 16 O Remote Open Window Feature If Er General Infortiallofl 22s amare s 17 LE EO topi W Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 17 A ee Suet idest dus E O Programming Additional Transmitters 29 TO Ari Ue siste suceso KORE RE E RR 18 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id O Pattery Replacement us EE KLAER EER DE 24 EV PUNCHING iek ESE ROER KRAKE AO ee 37 O
216. er by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will di
217. er is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten until snug General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is from one to two years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME e Doors closed WARNING Continued e Hood clos
218. er selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C on or off User selectable A C on or off 81412736 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and te
219. es not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPMS Telltale Light will remain on and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 358 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four activ
220. essary repeat this procedure 27 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I C an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 28 Cruise Indicator
221. f eight compass readings and the outside temperature Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Turn signal on with a continuous warning chime Left front turn signal light out with a single chime Left rear turn signal light out with a single chime Right front turn signal light out with a single chime Right rear turn signal light out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal settings not available vehicle not in PARK UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Left right front door ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Left right rear door ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Door s ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate ajar with a single chime Left front low pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting And Operating Left rear low pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting And Operating Right front low pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting And Operating 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Right rear low pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting And Operating e Chec
222. g a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 If a ch
223. g acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in OVERDRIVE and in DRIVE NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usu ally after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis sion is not shifting into OVERDRIVE when cold This is normal 308 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id e If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torgue converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torgue con verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED MP 143 Single Speed Part Time Transfer Case Transfer Case Switch Operating Information Precautions The transfer case is operated by the transfer case switch located on the center console The electronically shifted transfer case provides two mode positions e Two wheel drive high range 2WD e Four wheel drive high range AWD LOCK NS TA TING AND OPERATING 309 The electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD fo
224. g more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to
225. ger seats The controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off a When High level is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat output then drops to the normal High level setting If High level is Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This selected the system will automatically switch to Low level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous op eration At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Opera tion on Low level also turns Off automatically after approximately 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medicat
226. ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 6 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will
227. h your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is in the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever 031407550 Fog Light Operation NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the parking lights or the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signal Operation NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights
228. he person listed in those documents 474 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National H
229. hear a click gt e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued 022607389 Latch Plate To Buckle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING Continued tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your ab domen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
230. hen equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached NOTE Metal rails crossbars are offered by MOPAR accessories See your authorized dealer External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity CAUTION e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as pos sible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds re
231. hicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owmer s Manual For Further Information 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat INTRODUCTION 5 belts could cut the highway dea
232. hicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating
233. hould be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigera
234. however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safet standards and i is approved tor hi hwa use igits ABCD Code used by the tire ee one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or
235. ific design ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS When To Use 4L or 4LO Low Range When off road driving shift to 4L or 4LO for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L or 4LO range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv ing through water may cause damage th
236. ighway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 475 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes
237. ild teenager or even an adult 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING WARNING Continued e No objects should be placed over or near the e Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in airbag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the Advanced Front Airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Continued any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC airbags may offer side impact and vehicle rollover
238. ild from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint customer center Phone numbers are provided under If Refer to Child Restraints You Need Assistance You should read the instructions provided with your WARNING child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more shoulder belts properly severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Always wear your seat belts even though you have Airbags room to inflate airbags 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your Continued vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extendi
239. ill in REVERSE gear carefully Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the front wheels slowly left and right This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb 314 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case to 4L or 4LO range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage e Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required e Check threaded fasteners for loosenes
240. ill now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone lf Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the vol
241. imar language return to main menu select phone send N set up phone settings or phone list names list phones mobile mute off towing assistance new entr transfer call Uconnect Tutorial try again OO n pager pair a phone voice training ohone pairing pairing work ohonebook ohone book yes previous record again o redial N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation s This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level ase c Hi Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept
242. ing from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Manual Heating and Air Conditioning Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather 045607535 The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Blower Co
243. ion alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat Feature To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger WARNING comfort Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear seat to recline the seatback Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked NOTE e Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seat to its mid track position e Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to Aa 030932731 fold down easily Rear Seat Release Strap
244. ire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN id Temperature Grades WARNING The tempera
245. irnan eee EO S 431 Filters pele CAGANCl ii nee 9998 eee eee RUE BRA ES 410 ie CONGIMONING gerrira srie EDE RS ERE 286 bien Old ts oen i de HERMA S MESA TS 410 446 Finish ate 344 4o74 5 dees e bod 429 a EEEELLSLIILLIIIIIIIULIIUIISIILIIILLLIILLILILIIILLLBLAeOeO L ULAULLCELLLLLALL LIII NU BO eaeAaAG GIooC O OAALULAULUAULLL KcL LLEAISLLL 0LLLLULIGD INDEX 485 Flashers Hazard Ware 4 406205 MES RR ae HEN EE 386 Tr Signal sade wearer DADE 90 195 441 442 443 Flooded Engine Starting vu sat dk ob x ree 294 Floor Console isme HAR EIER EIS dele d OE 179 HlukL Brake 64 4488 EE SENSE EES RE EE 447 Fid Bell GE auca amp born s dx DES IEEE IS e Bs 445 Fluid Leaks 2562424446 4656650444652 865 91 Fluid Level Checks 6 uu saw cies ned ena ves 426 427 Automatic Transmission 425 Eusine OU ceacagGeeuss lt tone op eae S BIS 407 Power SIGENDE Pm 316 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 446 Los LEDE ONE ate eN ES UR E dea 442 FOCTICING CrCT 150 442 Folding Rear DERE se i re rad RE HEER eee ee 142 Four Wheel Drive eee 308 Bosco so EERS SG DR eee 308 DVCICUS s o OERE EERS NARE AR DA HE ED 308 Four Wheel Drive Operation v 299 438 HS ES 308 Four Way Hazard Flasher 156 ess tes 386 Front Axle Differential iss uem devo 46 3 427 Ii rr 358 Piller Cap Gas Cop ss ac do Mee MEES ACE a 364 src Em 358 fou RC EE TEE IT 192 iit sos is ei ba OER OAK OO RA ED AE
246. is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory
247. isplay PARK ASSIST DISABLED Further more once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle and the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone e f a ParkSense system malfunction occurs a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM and the LED in the ParkSense Rear Park Assist switch will illuminate If this occurs after making sure the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris see your authorized dealer for service CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 CAUTION Continued WARNING e The vehicle must be driven slowly when using e Drivers must be careful when backing up even ParkSense to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder
248. itial deceleration The SABIC will not deploy in all side collisions SABIC deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light for four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned ON After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup o Y It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect th
249. ius ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 275 Identification Number ESN SID 76 WiClimate Controls io cnaa 275 m va pd eee ee Nu O Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 275 Bate lite ANTENNA osos e se RED HIE SEP E d a 270 ride Temperature ibd d 979 O Reception Quality i s 2548454 ke 5450255 270 D Operating Tips o o eese 285 O Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode 270 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Storage Tray 4 Center Air Outlet 5 Radio 4p SA 3 OOO 6 Glove Compartment 7 Climate Control 8 Heated Seat Switch 9 Rear Park Assist Switch 10 Passenger Airbag Disable Light 040132715 11 Hazard Warning Flasher 12 Electronic Stability Program Trac tion Control Switch 13 Cigar Lighter Power Outlet 14 Storage Bin f Equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 14 FM 101 1 10 040309166 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Fuel Door Reminder This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle lt where the fuel cap is located 3 Temperature Gauge
250. k TPM System with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting And Operating e Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Operating e Oil change required with a single chime e Park Assist Disabled e Service Park Assist System with a single chime e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator if equipped Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system
251. king brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces
252. l and vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object
253. l brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 20 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the fog lights are On 21 Oil Pressure Warning Light qm This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 22 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds er as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first N turned ON If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 23 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RP
254. l for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the gt vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should Jack Storage Location be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or Spare Tire Stowage slippery areas 060532823 The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the l vehicle and is held in place by a cable winch mechanism Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in the left rear trim panel behind the second row seat WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389 a Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut Use the aa lug wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the The winch mechanism is designed for use with the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle other power tools is not recommended and they can damage the winch When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid icy or 6 slippery areas 060532824 Lowering Raising Spare Tire 390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to movi
255. lable operating modes in 2WD 4WD Part Time 4WD Full Time and on 2WD vehicles ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 ESP On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2WD 4WD Part Time 4WD Full Time and on 2WD vehicles When ever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most all driving situations ESP should only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch located in the center stack lower switch bank When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indi cator Light will be illuminated All other stability fea tures of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP ON mode of operation ESP Off Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation 328 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on
256. less Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 021432707 Three Button RKE transmitter 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE e For the remote starting feature if equipped refer to Remote Starting System for further information e Your vehicle s RKE transmitter may have three or four buttons depending on the optional features purchased with your vehicle To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors and the liftgate The parking lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors and the liftgate on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 s
257. life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Backup Lamp 1 Open the lift gate 2 Remove the two push pins 819e23d7 Push Pins 3 Pull lamp straight back and disconnect electrical con nection 4 Remove the two screws attaching the backplate to the lamp assembly 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 5 Pull the backplate straight back from the lamp hous ing 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 7 Remove the bulb from the backplate Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 1 Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL Screw Locations 2 Disconnect the electrical connector and washer hose if equipped from the CHMSL 3 Replace the CHMSL N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel Approximate 19 5 Gallons 73 8 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 Quarts 4 7 Liters 52 Liters Cooling System NENNEN 3 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 14 Quarts 13 3 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 4 0 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 14 Quarts 13 3 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Ye
258. listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the 368 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way
259. llow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Continued Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size EE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is located on the B Pillar along the outboard side and rear of the seat cushion The rear seat belt latch plates are located on the C Pillar for the outboard rear seating positions and next to your arm in the center rear seating position Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Latch Plate 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you
260. low these cautions can cause damage to If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned the heating elements OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park e Use care when washing the inside of the rear position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on resume function at whichever position the switch is set the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Mode knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra mirrors An indicator in the button will illuminate when sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the the rear window defroster is on The rear window window defroster automatically turns off after approximately Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 ROOF TRIM APPLIQUE NON FUNCTIONAL The Roof Trim Applique as provided on the vehicle is non functional Metal side rails and crossbars can be purchased from MOPAR accessories to provide a func tional roof rack system The load carried on the roof w
261. lows all four wheels to receive torque from the engine simultaneously COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED The Compass Trip Computer features a driver interactive display displays information on outside tem perature compass direction and trip information It is located on the lower left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine temperature gauge and the tachometer Compass Trip Computer Display Control Buttons Press and release the odometer trip odometer reset but ton right side of the instrument cluster to access the compass trip computer displays 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving 041032718 Display Button The compass trip computer when the appropriate con ditions exist will show the following messages in the odometer display e Door Ajar door e Lift Gate Ajar gATE e Loose Fuel Cap gASCAP These messages can be manually turned off by pressing the right button on the instrument cluster Trip Conditions Trip Odometer ODO ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right b
262. m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 ke i x4 STARTING AND OPERATING 375 When Towing Trailers with Gross Trailer Weight GTW between 3 500 Lbs 1 588 kg and 5 000 Lbs 2 268 kg The following chart provides maximum trailer weight ratings towable for the following engine transmission combinations ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Tongue Wt Trailer Wt See Note 3 7L Automatic w Trailer 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg Tow Package 4 0L Automatic w Trailer Tow Package 64 sq ft 5 94 sg m 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg 4 0L Automatic w Trailer 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 lbs 2 268 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg Tow Package Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo ie the GVWR and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the tire and loading informa tion placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information 3 7L Automatic w Trailer 4x4 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 lbs 2 268 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg Tow Package 3 6 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over th
263. m emt 148 O Lights Om Reminder ace entes 149 o High Low Beam Switch Lis 149 East oase tandem e dre AAN CERE EP 149 O Front Fog Lights If Equipped 150 TUR SIS DIAS ooo qure Poles cda EC dor aea 150 E bane Chance Assist sata de oes P KERR 151 B Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 151 EIGIGUOE PIE MS acu scariot aceite Sr Sore HER EI 151 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 152 3 Windshield Wiper Operation 152 O Intermittent Wiper System 4 154 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 o Windshield Washers 154 ELSE Peale is oo IE ke ee each ee oe oo RS 155 B Tilt Steering Column 155 Bl Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 156 H TOANGU Vale ost we s See Pais e ddr 157 El To Set a Desired Speed iiem xo 158 ATO Deaelivale ii ooie DERE KAR ER den d 158 H To Resume Speed a ss ese Ma BEE ve HO 158 o To Vary The Speed Setting 23 uas am se RE si 158 o To Accelerate For Passing 159 ll Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 159 O System Usage Precautions vue xvm ew dew 160 O Enabling And Disabling Parksense O Parksense Operation 2499 vu PER RR ERWE 163 O Service Parksense Rear Park Assist 164 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 165 O Programming HomeLink O Gate Operator Canadian Programming Using TIOMeCLINK 255 483 45494 Fee es 169 o Reprogramming A Single
264. mage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight ened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte I v nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II sys
265. men should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air bag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags THINGS T
266. mission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e Vehicle speed e Engine RPM e Brake switch status e Pedal position e And other configuration Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled
267. mperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected 045607559 e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the LED in the control button to illumi nate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If
268. n of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the ra
269. n prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Front Manual Seat Adjustment Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched bar Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near the floor Position the seat and release the bar making WARNING m BIS lees ADDIT des Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could M T cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked 030907089 Manual Seat Adjustment 136 UNDERSTANDING
270. n selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed MEDIA CENTER 130 RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate SING MP Ca T cs 3p me LE DISC 042305232 Media Center 13
271. n the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left locations and remove the jack and wheel blocks JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly Preparations for Jump Start so please follow the procedures in this section carefully The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and NOTE The positive battery post is covered with a precautions protective cap Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post CAUTION Do n
272. nately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change NOTE For best access to the oil filter a drive on hoist should be used instead of a chassis hoist 3 7L Only Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
273. nd In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L or 4LO if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information Do not shift to a NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 313 lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4L or 4LO Use first gear and 4L or 4LO for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back straight down a h
274. nd CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3
275. nd damage the emission control system tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or systems can result in civil penalties being assessed some light smoke your engine may be out of tune against you or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 363 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine runni
276. nd release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais As you continue the information will display in the selected language Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen gers doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the
277. nd result in loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuver ing parking or stopping e Do not drive too fast for road conditions especially when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can build up between the tire tread and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking ability and control e After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes an Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Elec tronic Stability Program ESP All five systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP 322 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Anti Lock Brake System ABS WARNING Thi t ids the driver i intaini hicl l RS D eM Lei An ee The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road help avoid skiddi
278. ndling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued 346 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued CAUTION e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire observe the following precautions Dae and loss of slee ol e Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage
279. nect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your celluar phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level be
280. ner s Manual for specific instructions on how to j drop the Bluetooth connection e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delet
281. ng for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued 364 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id ADDING FUEL CAUTION Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use with this vehicle e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling 81937590 Fuel Filler Cap NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 365 WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas container
282. ng on slippery surfaces during braking AB Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and conditions S cannot prevent accidents including Operating for further information those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others NS TA TING AND OPERATING 323 Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situati
283. ng placed on the second row of seats because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the seats in the second row check to be sure they don t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dealer If there is a fault present in the airbag system the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should have an autho rized dealer service the system immediately The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is a fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in the PAD Indicator Light the Airbag Warning Light will be illuminated to show that the passenger Advanced Front Airbag may be turned off until the fault is cleared If the Airbag Warning Light is illuminated have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STA
284. ng the driver to the exten sion and then to the lug wrench 3 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front tires place it rearward of the notch on the body weld seam behind wheel to be changed For the rear tires place it under the 392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES axle by the wheel to be changed Position the jack handle on the jack Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged P PL ME et 060532826 Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface Front Jacking Location and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 060532825 N VV HAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393 WARNING wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could station slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the 10 L he j its fully cl ition vehicle only enough to remove the tire EL EE WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Positio
285. ng traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle 3 Place the shift lever into PARK 4 Turn the ignition to the LOCK position Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised dee dca MORD act Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic 6 Block both the front and rear of the transmission in PARK a manual transmission in I wheel diagonally opposite of the jack REVERSE E ing position For example if changing Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a the right front tire block the left rear jack wheel Continued E RON LAG Rar WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391 A 7 P ES Jack Warning Label 1 Remove spare tire 2 Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket As semble the tools by connecti
286. ng your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel The Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on each type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe in
287. ning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the seat belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 Cartridge Description Fuse Fuse EE RR DOOR NODE WE eie Anti Lock Brake Sys J6 tem ABS Pump ESP p 30 Amp NEN Anti Lock Brake Sys Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM EUN a ae J 40 Amp Power Memory Seat Fuse Fuse Jo 40 Amp PZEV Motor Flex Green Fuel 40 Amp NEM Power
288. nob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Automatic Temperature Control Operation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control The system will Air Temperature Control Air Recirculation Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Sct blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Automatic User selectable to any speed Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes at a time Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes at a time Automatic Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Sct blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Automatic User selectable to any speed User selectable to any air delivery point User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic Automatic User selectable outside or recirculated Us
289. normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like WARNING particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for Deployed airbags cannot protect you in another col airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate lision Have the airbags and seat belt retractor as the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye sembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or possible throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the compone
290. nside The UD P eye aes as 54 AONO TU 540440 96555 45454 RO RE 88 H Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 62 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make O Event Data Recorder EDR 74 Outside The Vehicle 90 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic The keys for your vehicle are double sided You can bag with the key code number on it If you received your insert the keys into the locks with either side up keys without the bag ask your authorized dealer to give you the number The key code can also be obtained by an authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission e Place the shift lever in PARK e Push the key and cylinder inward slightly and rotate the key to the LOCK position e Remove the key 021432707 Vehicle Key THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION 020232708 An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Ignition Switch Positions Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all 1 Lock 3
291. nt Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant
292. ntrol 045607539 Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds Temperature Control 045607540 Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes 045607544 The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directe
293. ntry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessibl
294. nts or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel or the headliner along the side rails Do not modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure Continued accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact The airbag warning light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with airbag system electrical compo nents The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e Does not come on during the four to eight seconds after the ignition switch is first turned ON e Remains on after the four to eight second interval e Comes on for any period of time while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of a collision your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific
295. o blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or dec
296. of opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET Your vehicle is equipped with a fused 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet This power outlet is located on the instru ment panel below the climate controls It has power available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use to ensure proper operation To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Wat
297. on by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated 324 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may
298. on dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the amp button to begin 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the amp button
299. on on using the rear window wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Under standing the Features of Your Vehicle 036407502 Wiper Washer Lever Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for high speed wiper operation 031507503 Front Wiper Control NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 CAUTION Continued e Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the park position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while they are operating The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON position CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Continued off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur 154 UNDERSTANDING
300. on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command EVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command vR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available
301. onds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 6 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 7 Speedometer Shows the vehicles speed 8 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam head me lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yours
302. ontrol 156 Electronic Stability Program ESP 194 325 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 211 Emergency In Case of Jacking Jump Starting 484 INDEX NEE Id O OES AR N AT OFF 386 TOWING A DT Emission Control System Maintenance 404 450 ENGNG T OR EDE RA RD ER Y 401 ie AREA 2 eke bua SS PPP Pd 410 Block Feal susce woe ko ERES FASES ae neve 296 Break In Recommendations 86 Compare seess esminio VER RA DE 401 402 Compartment Identification 402 Coolant Antifreeze lees 446 Exhaust Gas Caution saa b or s 87 363 Fails tO Stall ss se os oet EE BERE BEES Eee HE 294 Hooded Slaring 223 eh sae ad SR NEER 294 Fuel Requirements 223223292 99 EX EY 358 445 EED SE e ul opo MM D sib Bi 393 sl m 407 445 446 Oil Dis besede bei DRR ORR ee PIS PES 409 OIL filter 4e PUE dS RS REDE ASA E EEG 410 Ol SeleCHOM 4645 56 OS REOR OR UR dCR oe ED ees 445 Did kaeli PDT 409 rele EE 44 sex SERE EER PI EAR SR RS 386 DIGI Mr dee SURE A 293 Temperature Gauge dues edo e RR RD ee ea 192 Eneime Od VISCOSIDY aues asd Sore d gcn a eot a abut 409 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart assesses 409 Enhanced Accident Response Feature zi Entry System Illuminated ss va heh 19 Exhaust Gas Caution leen 87 363 EXNaust System ass sis rd RA KAAR ERK 87 415 ale AAS RR EE RE NEE 429 ELNO Lise aa usd oad oe AE EE one DE 90 IS losie jy 4404 r
303. ooLCUDLLICL DIAAU U UP AGd adAL Uu 00 LLULL A Il ALOU UAUU OMOA TAS A ATGASAddGu uw eULLL 7 2 OE 7C CUPOS ss soos t espe EA ETHER A Ra EZ DS 177 Customer Assistance sn 471 Daytime Running Lights 151 Dealer DE VEE uus woes quss 2G A antari kirE Tre 406 Defroster Rear Window 184 Defroster Windshield 89 277 283 Delay Intermittent Wipers 154 Diagnostic System Onboard cuve sep dees 403 Dimmer Switch Headlighl sacas n 149 Dipsticks OM ESME 2 essa red ba PRAG SERRE BOE 407 POW er DISSE osse x ers ee HOORN d 316 Disposal Eise CE sie doe RO RD REED MED A ROS ete as 409 Used Coolant Antifreeze LL 421 Door Locks usa ota eS Ge Ee ee es HEHE AE 28 Door Opener Garage Bid e649 oes RESTE 165 EE oes ae e eS A bese DR eS De 310 Off Pavement 6 444445444 e64 4446942 48555 311 Off Road ace 44544 EO EE EES oll Electric Remote Mirrors leen 99 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 175 Electrical Power Outlets SS 175 Electronic Brake Control System 321 Anti Lock Brake Systemi 54444644 ORE RD 922 Brake Assist Systemi excu ep de ETE nerse 323 Electronic Roll Mitigation sees see 324 Electronic Stability DEOSEdU se so ER Dee ties 325 Traction Control SySIePU sescca same VA ARE 323 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 324 Electronic Speed Control Cruise C
304. oor Locks Programming The automatic door locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the automatic door locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The automatic unlock doors on exit feature is enabled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The automatic unlock doors on exit feature can be enabled or disabled
305. operation of four wheel drive vehicles de Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six pends on tires of equal size type and circumference years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule You could lose control and have an accident resulting should be followed to balance tire wear in serious injury or death Life Of Tire Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little The service life of a tire is dependent upon various exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact factors including but not limited to with oil grease and gasoline e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 345 Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tires The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety ha
306. or System TPMS 348 N Tires General Information 338 O Base System ook Ee b donde knee ke d ELT Pressure oi sacs a eor qd ho d do ea as 338 O Premium System If Equipped O Tire Inflation Pressures eese y ea 339 E General information ss sesse rem o Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 341 W Fuel Requirements 358 E Radial Ply Tires sesse s mere Rn ar 341 ups EP ie Pr 358 H Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 341 aU BOCINC 4 4 diues bee MES BESK X RUE oH 99d ad lie ES sre due eee BRE S ER 342 O Relormulated Gasoline san v due E yes 959 rea Wear Indicators 32 aee ARE KERR DES 343 O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 360 202 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 360 O Common Towing Definitions 368 AMMI JL OG soliie ace dotes equa Of oe em aNg 361 E Tratler Hitch Classification ss os etse serais 373 O Materials Added To Fuel 361 H Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer O Fuel System Caut ns iun o wp GR SDA de 362 ea LE is H Carbon Monoxide Warnings 363 oa EE a dd ie Fue eau RO ohne eke ee bee BIRD 364 M D EE us 4 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap ice 364 EL TIOWTOS IIPS diceva 4 dde 9 v ge EE HEG RACE 382 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 365 cerae din oe 383 M Vehicle Loading sie Eon 999 exo es 366 oe Dive Modele aooaa aaa 383 HCerb caBoH Label sirs meten 366 D Four Wheel Driv
307. or front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s and rear center include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly
308. osse See Ca ea ER E S O Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped iaa cba som ds D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped O Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio O Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio ll Media Center 130 RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MES Audio Play ausu do BR nmn O Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Media Center 130 RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Radio D Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And DIE AUdIO Play siese wou ws e riesi O Notes On Playing MP3 Files 240 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 263 O Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone O Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 263 If Equipped 2 eee eee eee 272 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio L d A e System Controls E If Equipped ee 264 SUID DEUS EE EE EE spits O Radio Operation EE SE SE se 273 ll Uconnect M Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES Radios Only 268 EE DIL Eis bese web DAE OER ees O System Activation 22 dese kes he di Re 269 W CD DVD Disc Maintenance O Electronic Serial Number Sir
309. ot use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen 3077 It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury H era z pro 060809467 Positive Battery Post N WHATTODOI NEMERGENCIES 395 WARNING 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump Starting Procedure skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK plosion 2 Turn off the
310. other occupants the PAD indicator light will be illuminated indicating that the passenger Advanced Front Airbag is turned off and will not inflate NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an occupant classification system children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint refer to Child Re straints WARNING Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an airbag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat Passenger Airbag Disable PAD System Grocery Bags Heavy Briefcases and Other Rela tively Light Ob jects Empty or Very Light Objects FF Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occupant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door or instrument panel the weight sensors in the seat may N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improp erly classified Ensure that the front passenger seatback does not touch anythi
311. ou must mate the harness to a trailer connector ud ka Refer to the following illustrations N OTTO aids refs 5 0O 9 c OE 7 9 mE O 057003765 o Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 057003766 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn Four Pin Connector 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps Female Pins 4 Park As e ae 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 382 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL button if equipped or a lower gear range should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL button 3 7L engine or 4 range 4 0L engine while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals TOW HAUL If Equipped To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing press the TOW HAUL
312. ound will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 452 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals CAUTION as required e Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles de e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and the brake master cylinder add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct pends on tires of equal size type and circumfer operation ence on each wheel Any difference in tire size can At Each Oil Change cause damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear e Change the engine oil filter Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals e Inspect the brake hoses and lines M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 453 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rota
313. per looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 461 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter _1 Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary t E E NH E Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joint
314. phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the e button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the EVR button
315. programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped On some models the driver s and front passenger s if equipped for passenger side power window switches have an Auto Up feature Pull the window switch up to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way pull the window switch up to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information NOTE e f the window runs
316. programmed i e func tional RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Flash Lights with Lock The feature will cause the parking lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information e On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK
317. programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels NN UND
318. protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC airbags deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require side airbag occupant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Continued 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued e If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including addin
319. r Advanced Front Airbag e Knee Impact Bolster e Passenger Advanced Front Airbag N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors e Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger e Occupant Classification System OCS e Occupant Classification Module OCM e Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light e Weight Sensors Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended NOTE The passenger Advanced Front Airbag may not deploy even when the driver Advanced Front Airbag has if the Occupant Classification System refer to Oc cupant Classification System has determined the pas senger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the child size category This could be a ch
320. r five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW a
321. r heat build up may cause serious injury or death Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 WARNING Continued Exhaust Gas e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area WARNING inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change
322. r in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 EXAMPLE Service Description 00000000 Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire ge associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 332 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on
323. r normal street and highway conditions dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case AWD LOCK position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the transfer case switch to the desired posi tion Refer to Shifting Procedure for specific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK position is designed for loose slippery road surfaces only CAUTION e Driving in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear Since four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit 310 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Shifting Procedure Electronically Shifted Transfer Case NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met
324. r s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent inge
325. r this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch
326. rake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The ABS conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing 5 320 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id The ABS pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph WARNING Continued 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is The ABS cannot prevent accidents including normal those resulting from excessive speed in turns WARNING e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press fi
327. ration condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale WARNING If the gross trailer weight is 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If you use a standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further infor mation 3 0 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must conside
328. re Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head dan restraints should always be checked prior to oper 030907533 ating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK pe Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE e The head restraints should only be removed by quali Continued fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 WARNING Continued e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of an accident and could result in serious injury or death Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passen
329. re required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the amp button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Ucon
330. read is worn to the tread wear result indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which Tire Spinning apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time STARTING AND OPERATING 343 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be 1 Worn Tire replaced 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 055007576 344 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION WARNING Proper
331. rease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or un defined None 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN 16 Digit Character Program Type Display 16 Digit Character Display Program Type Top 40 Top 40 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be
332. reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway striking objects and or other vehicles NS TA TING AND OPERATING 325 WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle
333. released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pressed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 sec ond periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up 296 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord e The engine block heater cord is found under the hood clipped to
334. retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing and moves the sunroof in the opposite direction press the switch forward and hold This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half sec ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun ro
335. rial pollutants N s MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels such as steel wool or scouring powder which will completely with clear water scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi e Jf insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug paint and decals and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Special Care Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive and to protect your paint finish Take care never to near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once scratch the paint a month 7 e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint of the doors rocker panels and liftgate are kept clear finish and open 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cau
336. river s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position The manufacturer does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and fasten the driver seat belt 2 Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver seat belt at least three times ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn OFF the engine A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belt Lock Out The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless the rear seat upper latch is engaged Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant wo
337. rking brake brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle before attempting to move the vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front seriously or fatally injured wheels toward the curb oe downhill grade and Ad Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking operate power windows other controls or move brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the vehicle the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 319 WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking b
338. rmly on your brake pedal when you need following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others CAUTION The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded electronic interference caused by improperly in stalled aftermarket radios or telephones Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the ABS is functioning Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action longer stopping dis tances or brake damage When descending mountains or hills repeated brak ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos sible Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm up which could cause rear wheels to spin a
339. rolled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few Shift Lever 304 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in REVERSE You could lose con
340. rost mode and place WARNING the blower control on high speed You should be able to Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of feel the air directed against the windshield See your vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per authorized dealer for service if your defroster is sonal injury inoperable e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Floor Mat Safety Information Never place or install floor mats or other floor Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other Ways Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued e Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objec
341. rrect amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Dome Lp NN d OER ER Ee 1L212 2 ESAS Lamp e soe ER MEN a de a Rn 567 Overhead Console Lamps PLW214 2A Reading Lap ie betas eee E WL212 2 LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No HCA 2244 bek oka eo cR ee ee d 9008 H13 Front Park Dur uda soe be eed 3157AK Front Sidemarker 0 000 00048 168 ld Cr 3057K Center High Mounted Stoplamp LED serviced at an authorized dealer FOS BOE s euch cee eae S I9 qw EDE RED s H10 9145 License Plate Lamp oseca seantero t bee ee nii 168 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal 2a n 3057K BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamp 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlamp unit in the engine com partment to access the headlamp bulb lock ring 3 Firmly grasp the lock ring on the back of the headlamp unit housing N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 4 Rotate the lock ring on the back of the headlamp housing counterclockwise to unlock it CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 5 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
342. rson however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off 045607536 position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control k
343. rticular area of the side of the vehicle depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protection WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions The front passenger s
344. ry during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing methanol or E85 ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metalli
345. s Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Replace the spark plugs 4 0L Engine Replace the timing belt 4 0L Engine I Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 11
346. s Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for
347. s The use of exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this longer disc loading times display Supported MP3 File Formats e Maximum number of characters in file folder names The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten is sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three i i character extension extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three not play the file character extension 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not
348. s chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 374 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Model Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Max Tongue Wt See Transmission Wt Note 3 7L Automatic 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 ke 200 Ibs 91 kg 4 0L Automatic 32 sq ft 2 97 sg m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg 4 0L Automatic 32 sq ft 2 97 sg m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 ke Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo ie the GVWR and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the tire and loading informa tion placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information i 3 7L Automatic 32 sq ft 2 97 sg
349. s particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 315 WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessaty e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions
350. s an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in You or others can be badly burn
351. s lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 16 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light The yellow Electronic Stability Program ESP 5 Traction Control System TCS indicator light in the speedometer area illuminates with the key in the ignition switch turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running The ESP TCS Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The ESP TCS Indicator Light becomes illuminated when the ESP Off button has been pressed or ESP is only partially available caused
352. s of whether you are inside or outside the vehicle If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Manually unlocking the doors with the door lock plunger located on the inside of the doors or the driver s door key lock cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to un lock any door They will remain on for approximately 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using your Remote Key
353. s on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened e If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic Sys tem in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 366 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN
354. s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 022607492 022607497 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHRat 1 Downward Movement a comfortable position 2 Rearward Movement THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 SS 022607757 pe 022607494 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mecha AHR In Reset Position EE EE NOTE 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the into the back decorative plastic half Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active
355. s set to panel or panel floor Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will c put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the sys tem will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled Air Conditioning Control T 045607557 Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MA
356. s the vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow 384 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id vehicle or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled See your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal and reinstallation procedures including flange orientation alignment use of thread locking compound proper bolt torque specifications etc NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground Four Wheel Drive or All Wheel Drive Models CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing All Four Wheels On The Ground Recreational towing is NOT allowed These models do not have a NEUTRAL position in the transfer case NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flasher 386 O Jacking Instructions 390 lB If Your Engine Overheats 0 386 W jump Starting Procedures 393 W Jacking And Tire Changing 388 O Preparations For Jump Start AJack LOCATOR 330 1 29 ET OE EE N EE 388 O jump Staring Procedure 2 2 c2 xeu tes HS pare Tire DIDWHOE us de chnee dene E S dg S 388 Mi Towing A Disabled Vehicle El Spare lire Removal s 2
357. s the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCRO
358. s the updated tire pres sures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals NS TA TING AND OPERATING 353 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will
359. s to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact t
360. se which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal pol ishes Only MOPAR cleaners or equivalent are recom mended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 e For tough stains apply MOPARS Total Clean or
361. sed on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The OCM communicates with the ORC The ORC uses the occupant category to determine whether the passenger Advanced Front Airbag should be turned off It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 e Weight Sensors Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM e Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light The PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the passenger Advanced Front Airbag is turned off The PAD Indicator light illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the passenger Advanced Front Airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbag deployment When the right front pas senger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the passenger airbag will not inflate even though the PAD indicator light is not illuminated 022632713 Indicator Light Location The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passen ger seat In this case the passenger Advanced Front Airbag is ready to be inflated if a collision requires an airbag deployment 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id For all
362. ses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module ra NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 352 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receive
363. sh the horn will pulse on and off and the illuminated entry system will turn on The PANIC alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater During the PANIC mode the door locks and RKE systems will function normally PANIC mode will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm system on vehicles so equipped Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw 2 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter case apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal d Separating Case Halves 021432709 3 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 5 If the RKE transmitt
364. sis st di EERS SEE ENE 389 Programmable Electronic Features 219 Radial Py Ties oie os Ee ke ORR REKE bees 241 Radio Ope Ok sisie TESI EVA RR He P 2 9 Radio Satellite Uconnect studios 268 Rear Axle Differential Ls 427 Rear Park Sense yslel auos doe dee Rede 159 Rear Window Defroster llle 184 Rear Window Features 20008 183 Rear Wiper Waste ase duos 3 dup ag ia ced Sat xs 183 Rearview Mirrors 0 llle 97 Kees Front ES sewes das aSancaue SA ri 136 Recreational Towing o45444 544404422006 de 4 383 Reformulated Gasoline sss 359 PEA MP 413 Release Hood oe utei em p DAD E oe Qi WS 145 Isemandep LENS ON aka xy SENDE riat ARE 149 Reminder Seat Belt SS SS 52 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 0 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 273 Remote Star ng System x acdueeca d RR E EY eri 29 Replacement Keys ss erista karegi birek ei 15 Replacement Fane 235 9 92 ee 536554 ene eos 406 Replacement Tires 492 INDEX NEE Id Reporting sae Defects qa prp REY 2445 474 Restraint Head esses ema ORE ee RHE URS 138 R straints Child e srersrr rp Ee o e dei N 76 Restrainis OCCUPANT sms pie MR Reo eee ena 4 38 ii ide Ee iS HEER ds 4 Root Iype Carrier ssesrrreereriibipreiiri 185 Rotation Hie ak is Ena oa EE EE HEART NUS e D DA 347 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 23 aeg doe rs 88 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 90
365. soe ot qaot mando Gad bree sire 373 Holder COLE merse 2h enews oe eee eo Bee 179 Holder CUP 44 744 Prts IUE ance eee eee 177 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 165 Hood Release rugs peSR FeTSX RAMIS E 145 IGDIBON 2 2 peed ont eee OE AER RES E RE vd 12 ISGU 253 bead s EE EE EE EET OR ES 12 lenition Key REMOVAL 42453 44454 454 4486 54 12 Di gmigted EN sacs ee ELE ban OO ORE REY E 19 a EEEEELLLIIIILGGIIIUULIIUIGIILIIIILHILLLLILI GLLLILeuIL IIL L OOOO eU LULULL LLIXT CDLACGLIHIUUULL LULILLLLAALUILLL GCGCIIEAM INDEX 487 Immobilizer Sentry Key 44549544 92605455 set 14 Infant Restraint sa EES EER EES PAPA RS ES 76 77 Inflation Pressure Tires usc d acd eoe KENS 999 Information Center Vehicle 2H Inside Rearview Mirror sss 97 Instrument Cluster 0000 191 192 Instrument Panel and Controls 190 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 432 Integrated Power Module Fuses 432 Interior Appearance Care a2 su d doeet on 431 Inter T5 RE 9 4 eae eee ta trees nas ees 151 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 154 Introduction oss uoa reus ou peas AR S ee ead en 4 Jack Location 4 243 4 may dem SEE ME Rea doin 388 Jac Operation mos 32 92 4 x53 eee ee RUN 388 390 Jacking Instr clollS sos mp RULE eR 09s 390 JUMIP State EE OE OIE VER RU 393 Key POCI 265 acu s bo ek RED tae ease 4 16 Key Replacement san eeu fae Hence EP ROS d 15 Key Sentry
366. speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity 342 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may tread life When the t
367. splay for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or AC
368. ss and hold the shift lock lever down Interlock Manual Override 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used Four Speed Automatic Transmission 3 7L Engine NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 10 F 23 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only second gear operation Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears STARTING AND OPERATING 299 D e RE Es EE i EER EE Es AS y TENUIT a 2s s Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range 300 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this rang
369. stion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service atten dant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant
370. straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id belt However any seat belt system may loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow it to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is completely extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening
371. sult Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically
372. sulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS B Instrument Panel Features 190 Mi Instrument Cluster 191 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 192 ll Compass And Trip Computer If Equipped 207 A Control DORS srerseisrers DR irit 207 El DiE SREIUDIS aos 2uboe5R6hs ep tees Ss 208 O Compass Temperature Display 209 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC IR EQUIDPCO euo vod muta cased a eee d 211 D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Bor P TIT E Oil Change Req lted e 12 aos uc aa e n E Trip DUnEKONS osse Gate Gara be Gate dae 215 0 Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode lt PQUIDPCO sisie EER DERE neon es 216 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features oek R uu ope 4 N ADDR EE Ai 219 ll Media Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack n adco ssh oes 222 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video O Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files O List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play O Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play lll Media Center 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD NAV H Equipped
373. te tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 454 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary change if using your vehicle for police Inspect the CV joints
374. te tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear impro
375. tem may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothin
376. tention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Uconnect Phone Button Depending on the vehicle options either the amp radio or the mirror will contain the two control buttons amp Uconnect Phone button and vr Voice Command button that will en able you to access the system Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra ti VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so eguipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands a
377. th an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owne
378. th toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION W D e HJ Wf a d Sas a lo ar af si ECYHDHIC BTA SR ITT ATEN iH FUEL NEAR lk KA FXTEDICR EAR iiia OE AA TURM inda t umm is oa EA FLECTRONIC PADICANH MAANI WET FAILUME FPFF CONTRE jer de m TIS iui x 3 z y ws ZO oi gas o FEL REAR WIMDCHN WINDSHIELD MASTER LOATH CENE Hen ANG LOWER HEATED I HEAT DEW LET TERE PRESSURE DIE LL DELET wina PARING WITETMETTENT APEN WEE FATEH PEREN CRITLET MDAITIRA we OE FU T B NO C2 7 Dad Dea BH we a FUEL FILL SE REAR WAN PRCA A DOME LEEK FHOHTFOS LOW HBOODRELEAHE LOWER AR amp ECIHCUILATIOR TOHVEITELE TRAAG TIM ALL ent FAILURE OP A4THLOCK MATETE FLA LEVEL Pm eT A WIMDCHN DERI FORT HAA SYEIEM 00 a aT m GE pili QE CS
379. that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal Replacement Keys vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
380. the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The transmission is moved out of PARK e The brake pedal is pressed To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle
381. the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recircula tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion prot
382. the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Place the handheld transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code oystem 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly
383. the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types Program Type Display 16 Digit Character Program Type iss Display No program type or un 7 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP
384. to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the word
385. to first gear after the initial first to second gear upshift Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn the engine off and turn the key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Only second gear will operate in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at a calibrated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may re sult in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed or durin
386. trol of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NS TA TING AND OPERATING 305 NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range is used for most city and highway driving Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shift lever left or right when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position allowing the selection of the desired top gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but can shift down into second gear or first gear when needed WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Display
387. ts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Front Power Outlet WARNING To avoid serious injury or death e Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Continued 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not touch with wet hands e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Continued vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug
388. ts the transmission into the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES mn SES Service ParkSense Rear Park Assist the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System is defec detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the tive the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long once per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic ParkSense will not operate Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after mak ing sure the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction see your authorized dealer GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink
389. ts can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel I engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately Information Provided by DEEFNLER UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS MIN DOORS oou oe FEES OE ER EN 97 O Inside Day Night Mirror
390. tuation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vn button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vn button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 from your Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Svea button and say Iransfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual
391. ture grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 480 INDEX NEE FER NNNM ias About Your Brakes ABS Anti Lock Brake System Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze Adding Fuel Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter Air Conditioner Maintenance Air Conditioning Air Conditioning Controls Air Conditioning Filter Air Conditioning Operating Tips Air Conditioning Refrigerant 413 Air Conditioning System 273219 X gll 4244 fee eee ERA EO HE Ve Re s 410 Air Pressure Tires SS SS Se 999 ur AM P C 54 Airbag Deployment seess odora 9 HER HE A
392. turn on upon the next ignition key cycle 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn off the TPMS Telltale Light as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS 354 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Telltale Light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System
393. tween one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect Phone The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Dial by Saying a Number Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name e
394. u can turn ParkSense on Mn off by piss mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its OFE the ParkSense Rear Park Assist switch located size and shape giving a false indication that an on the lower switch bank below the climate obstacle is behind the vehicle controls Enabling and Disabling ParkSense There are times when you may want to disable Park Sense such as when towing a trailer N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 ParkSense Operation ParkSense uses four sensors located in the rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from the rear bumper fascia The warning display located above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object 032805242 ParkSense LED Display The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the vehicle The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the display above the rear window When the ignition is turned to the ON position and the system is enabled the warning display will turn on all of its LEDs for approximately one second Then the system dimly illuminates the two inner most LEDs when it is detecting no obstacles ParkSense is active when the ignition is in the ON position and the system is enabled and the driver shif
395. uid Level Check oi a in transmission shift quality and or torque converter Your vehicle is equipped with a capped transmission oil fill tube It is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main Selection of Lubricant taining Your Vehicle for further information It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole 1 when the vehicle is in a level position
396. ule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary change if using your vehicle for police Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off roa
397. ulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 340 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage it Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the ve
398. ume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in Radio Operation Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next listenable station Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbuttons 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN CD Player Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on the CD Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CDs on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wip
399. up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it parameters depending on vehicle Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and con
400. urity modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed To Arm the System Remove the keys from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Close all the doors The Vehicle Security Light located in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this 16 second pre arm period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming process If the Vehicle Security Alarm arms successfully the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set Manually locking the doors with the door lock plunger located on the inside of the doors or the driver s door key lock cylinder will not arm the Vehicle Security Alarm To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If the previously described arming sequence has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardles
401. utton Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and
402. utton on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B or to ECO Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Compass Temperature Display Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE e A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sensor is located 040506040 Compass Variance Map
403. vd e NA 4WD BRAKE mige 2n MEAN WeMDOW ELFZTESCALL PAN LIGTE WEAR FOO LAMP AL DEFWOST AND VENTILATING AS WIP DZRWADICR ROTE FORM WEED a oet HL DEFROST HEATED l OPEN LOWEN AIA OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE mm DY A ey lb ow A SW Hee E poU HAUL BATTERY ise ATET dnte ua TE ad tre AAT li Lipi JOM pad Am CONDITA CHALD SEAT ini cecmirio Puch TERN i WAIL CHARGING FE THEN ARTHA e 40 A i OO CA w LOW LOWE ANDREAS iW FLUR HIPER VESEL KI WEER DOE ABAD SLID DOOD UM LOKTEN ANU TETHER EON UcNMECIT HAZARD EDU WHEEL STEERING FLUO AUD AE CHPLEREN LATCH BITTIDA DTE LA CY e E RIRERG qap d 1i F 2 PUSH OFF MALFUMCTION ENPRE COGLANT Sumi EMEHTAL WEE DERE ALIAM CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE BEE DERE MH CLES Teor INIBCATDHAE Lec oli TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAMTHYEZTEM ATFEAG OFF TOF DOWN TOF HE MARA ERI TXONDITIOHER READ ET EONTRERL OFF n10507683 INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind shield This numb
404. vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain per
405. vertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an chorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat An chorage System e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint designed to keep the lap portion tight
406. will turn on as Daytime Running Lights DRL and operate at lower intensity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is released and the shift lever is in any position except PARK NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Interior Lights The overhead light comes on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in approxi mately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position and the key is not in the ignition Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation Daytime Brightness Feature Certain instrument panel components odometer radio display can be illuminated at full brightness during the daytime This can be helpful when driving with your headlights on during the daytime such as in a parade or a funeral procession To activate this feature rotate the left stalk one detent lower than the dome light 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located at the end of the lever For informati
407. y result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS u
408. y take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player
409. you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system 316 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho Continued operation with reduced power steering rized dealer assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others CAUTION Service should be obtained as soon as possible Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurat
410. your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for fur ther information NS TA TING AND OPERATING 369 Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for ope

Owners Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents